1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the manual prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the manual may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % the pages of the TOC are numbered roman
19 % and a PDF-bookmark for the TOC is added
21 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
22 \renewcommand{\tableofcontents}{%
23 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
26 \pagenumbering{arabic}}
28 % extra space for tables
29 \newcommand{\extratablespace}[1]{\noalign{\vskip#1}}
31 \options bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
32 \use_default_options false
44 \maintain_unincluded_children no
46 \language_package default
49 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
50 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
51 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
52 \font_math "auto" "auto"
53 \font_default_family default
54 \use_non_tex_fonts false
58 \font_typewriter_osf false
59 \font_sf_scale 100 100
60 \font_tt_scale 100 100
62 \use_dash_ligatures true
64 \default_output_format pdf2
66 \bibtex_command default
67 \index_command default
68 \float_placement class
69 \float_alignment class
73 \pdf_title "LyX's Additional Features manual"
74 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
75 \pdf_subject "LyX's additional features documentation"
76 \pdf_keywords "LyX, Documentation, Additional"
78 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
79 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
80 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
85 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
86 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
89 \use_package amsmath 1
90 \use_package amssymb 1
93 \use_package mathdots 1
94 \use_package mathtools 1
96 \use_package stackrel 1
97 \use_package stmaryrd 1
98 \use_package undertilde 1
100 \cite_engine_type default
104 \paperorientation portrait
110 \notefontcolor #0000ff
117 \paragraph_separation indent
118 \paragraph_indentation default
120 \math_indentation default
121 \math_numbering_side default
122 \quotes_style english
126 \paperpagestyle headings
128 \tracking_changes true
129 \output_changes false
131 \postpone_fragile_content false
135 \docbook_table_output 0
136 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
137 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
140 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
141 \author 274215730 "scott"
142 \author 564990737 "John Lyx"
143 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
144 \author 1075283030 "Thibaut"
145 \author 1119979965 "Joel A. Kulesza"
151 Additional \SpecialChar LyX
155 \begin_layout Subtitle
157 \change_deleted 630872221 1622909155
159 \change_inserted 630872221 1622909155
166 by the \SpecialChar LyX
171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
173 Principal maintainer of this file is
175 Richard Kimberly Heck
178 If you have comments or error corrections,
179 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
180 Documentation mailing list,
182 \begin_inset Flex Code
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 <lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org>
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Standard
210 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865652
211 \begin_inset Note Note
214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
216 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865674
217 Note to all translators:
220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
222 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865817
223 This manual was restructured for LyX 2.4.
224 Attached are notes for translators to help them to find their way round the new structure of Additional.lyx.
225 This note itself will be deleted in the final 2.4 release.
226 \begin_inset Newline newline
232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
234 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
237 Additional.lyx 2.4 Changes
240 \begin_layout Itemize
242 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
247 \begin_layout Itemize
249 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
254 \begin_layout Itemize
256 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
263 \begin_layout Itemize
265 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
267 moved and minor edits
270 \begin_layout Itemize
272 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
277 \begin_layout Itemize
279 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
284 \begin_layout Itemize
286 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
291 \begin_layout Itemize
293 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
295 moved and significant edits
298 \begin_layout Itemize
300 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
305 \begin_layout Itemize
307 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
312 \begin_layout Itemize
314 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
316 moved and minor edits
319 \begin_layout Itemize
321 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
326 \begin_layout Itemize
328 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
333 \begin_layout Itemize
335 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
340 \begin_layout Itemize
342 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865801
347 \begin_layout Itemize
349 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865824
354 \begin_layout Itemize
356 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
361 \begin_layout Itemize
363 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
368 \begin_layout Itemize
370 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
375 \begin_layout Itemize
377 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
382 \begin_layout Itemize
384 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
389 \begin_layout Itemize
391 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
396 \begin_layout Itemize
398 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
400 moved with minor edits
403 \begin_layout Itemize
405 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
410 \begin_layout Itemize
412 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
417 \begin_layout Itemize
419 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
421 moved with minor edits
424 \begin_layout Itemize
426 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
431 \begin_layout Itemize
433 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
438 \begin_layout Itemize
440 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
445 \begin_layout Itemize
447 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
448 (Note that document classes which appeared in 2.3 but do not appear in 2.4 were either removed previously or have been removed during this revision because they are no longer available anywhere.)
452 \begin_layout Itemize
454 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
461 \begin_layout Itemize
463 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
464 All module descriptions new except:
467 \begin_layout Itemize
469 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
471 moved with minor edits
474 \begin_layout Itemize
476 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
477 Custom header/footer text:
478 moved with minor edits
481 \begin_layout Itemize
483 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
485 moved with minor edits
488 \begin_layout Itemize
490 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
491 Custom paragraph shapes:
492 moved with minor edits
495 \begin_layout Itemize
497 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
499 moved with minor edits
503 \begin_layout Itemize
505 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
512 \begin_layout Itemize
514 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
515 Content moved but unchanged
519 \begin_layout Itemize
521 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865831
528 \begin_layout Itemize
530 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
531 Content moved but unchanged
535 \begin_layout Itemize
537 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
540 new chapter and content
543 \begin_layout Itemize
545 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
546 All other chapters unchanged but renumbered except:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
551 \change_inserted 5863208 1672865845
552 section 11.3 Literate programming:
563 \begin_layout Chapter
567 \begin_layout Standard
568 This manual is essentially Part II of the
570 User's Guide\SpecialChar endofsentence
573 The reason for separating the two documents is simple:
578 is already quite lengthy,
579 and it contains information on all of the basic features one needs to know in order to prepare most documents.
582 Team has worked to make \SpecialChar LyX
583 extensible through various configuration files and external packages.
584 That means that if you want to support the Fizzwizzle \SpecialChar LaTeX
586 you can create a layout file (or module) for it without having to alter \SpecialChar LyX
588 We've already had contributions of several new features this way,
589 and some of them are documented here.
590 There are also some more `advanced' features,
591 such as how to control the presentation of bibliographies and how to work with multi-part documents,
592 that are not covered in the
596 and are discussed here.
599 \begin_layout Standard
600 This manual also documents some special features,
602 \change_deleted 244031559 1603802929
605 \change_inserted 244031559 1603802931
609 \change_deleted 244031559 1603802954
614 which require additional software to work properly.
615 There is also a chapter on \SpecialChar LyX
618 there's a chapter of \SpecialChar LaTeX
620 things you can use to spruce up your documents by directly using the powerful features of \SpecialChar LaTeX
628 only WYSIWYM and will only ever interface to some,
634 \begin_layout Standard
635 If you haven't read the
640 you are definitely in the wrong manual.
645 is the first place to go,
646 since it describes the notation and format of all of the manuals.
647 You should also be thoroughly familiar with the
651 and all of the basic features of \SpecialChar LyX
652 before attempting to read this one.
655 \begin_layout Standard
656 Since many of the topics in this manual depend heavily on \SpecialChar LyX
657 's interaction with \SpecialChar LaTeX
659 this first chapter covers the inner workings of \SpecialChar LyX
660 and how to direct \SpecialChar LyX
661 to generate exactly the \SpecialChar LaTeX
663 It is obviously for more seasoned \SpecialChar LyX
667 \begin_layout Chapter
669 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
673 \begin_layout Section
675 Uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
679 \begin_layout Standard
680 This chapter is for both \SpecialChar TeX
681 -nicians and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
684 we'll explain how \SpecialChar LyX
685 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
686 work together to produce printable output.
687 This is the only place in any of the manuals where we assume you know something about \SpecialChar LaTeX
691 \begin_layout Standard
695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
698 WYSIWYM frontend to \SpecialChar LaTeX
700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
703 but that's no longer true.
704 There are frontends to \SpecialChar LaTeX
709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
710 Some familar ones are \SpecialChar TeX
716 There are also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
717 modes for vi and emacs,
723 These are basically text editors with the ability to run \SpecialChar LaTeX
724 and mark any errors in the file you're editing.
725 Although \SpecialChar LyX
735 run \SpecialChar LaTeX
737 and it also indicates errors in the file,
741 you don't need to know \SpecialChar LaTeX
742 to use \SpecialChar LyX
745 has added its own extensions to \SpecialChar LaTeX
747 Try the following sometime:
749 \begin_inset Flex Noun
752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
760 \begin_inset Flex Noun
763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
770 \begin_inset Flex Noun
773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
774 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
785 then look at the preamble of the resulting
786 \begin_inset Flex Code
789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
796 You'll notice a variety of new macros defined specifically by \SpecialChar LyX
798 These macros are defined automatically,
799 according to the features you use in the document.
802 \begin_layout Standard
803 There are several commands that automatically invoke \SpecialChar LaTeX
808 \begin_layout Itemize
809 \begin_inset Flex Noun
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
822 \begin_layout Itemize
823 \begin_inset Flex Noun
826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
836 \begin_layout Standard
837 They will only invoke \SpecialChar LaTeX
838 if the file has changed since the last time \SpecialChar LaTeX
843 \begin_layout Standard
844 When \SpecialChar LyX
845 runs \SpecialChar LaTeX
846 on the file you're editing,
847 it performs these steps:
850 \begin_layout Enumerate
851 Convert the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
852 and save to a file with the extension
853 \begin_inset Flex Code
856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
863 \begin_inset Flex Code
866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
875 \begin_layout Enumerate
876 Run \SpecialChar LaTeX
878 \begin_inset Flex Code
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
887 file (maybe several times),
888 and run any other commands (such as
889 \begin_inset Flex Code
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset Flex Code
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
908 ) needed to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
912 \begin_layout Enumerate
913 If there are any errors,
917 \begin_layout Standard
918 If you have run \SpecialChar LaTeX
920 \begin_inset Flex Noun
923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
924 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
932 then runs a DVI viewer to display the DVI-file.
934 \begin_inset Flex Noun
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
938 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
946 performs further steps:
949 \begin_layout Enumerate
951 \begin_inset Flex Code
954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 to convert the DVI file to PostScript.
963 \begin_layout Enumerate
964 Run a PostScript viewer,
966 \begin_inset Flex Code
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
976 to display the PostScript file.
979 \begin_layout Standard
981 does similar things when viewing,
986 \begin_layout Section
987 Translating \SpecialChar LaTeX
988 files into \SpecialChar LyX
992 \begin_layout Standard
993 You can import a \SpecialChar LaTeX
994 file into \SpecialChar LyX
996 \begin_inset Flex Noun
999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
1001 Import\SpecialChar menuseparator
1007 command in \SpecialChar LyX
1009 This will call a program named
1010 \begin_inset Flex Code
1013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1019 which will create a file
1020 \begin_inset Flex Code
1023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1030 \begin_inset Flex Code
1033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 will then open that file.
1045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Flex Code
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1055 can also be run from the command line,
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 \begin_inset Flex Code
1068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1074 will translate most legal \SpecialChar LaTeX
1077 It will put things it doesn't understand into \SpecialChar TeX
1079 so after translating a file with
1080 \begin_inset Flex Code
1083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1090 you can look for \SpecialChar TeX
1091 code and hand-edit it until it looks right.
1094 \begin_layout Standard
1095 If you don't know what \SpecialChar TeX
1097 read the next section.
1100 \begin_layout Section
1101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1103 name "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
1107 Inserting \SpecialChar TeX
1108 Code into \SpecialChar LyX
1112 \begin_layout Standard
1113 Anything you can do in \SpecialChar LaTeX
1114 you can do in \SpecialChar LyX
1116 for a very simple reason:
1117 You can always insert \SpecialChar TeX
1118 code into any \SpecialChar LyX
1122 and will never be able to,
1123 display every possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
1125 If ever you need to insert \SpecialChar LaTeX
1126 commands into your \SpecialChar LyX
1129 \begin_inset Flex Code
1132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1140 which you can insert into your document with
1141 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
1155 or the keyboard shortcut
1164 \begin_layout Standard
1165 Here's an example of inserting \SpecialChar LaTeX
1166 commands in a \SpecialChar LyX
1168 The code looks like this:
1171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1175 \begin_inset Newline newline
1180 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1181 \begin_inset Newline newline
1184 This is an example of a minipage environment.
1186 \begin_inset Newline newline
1189 can put nearly everything in it,
1191 \begin_inset Newline newline
1196 \begin_inset Newline newline
1202 \begin_inset Newline newline
1206 \begin_inset Newline newline
1211 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1212 \begin_inset Newline newline
1218 \begin_inset Newline newline
1223 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1224 \begin_inset Newline newline
1229 \begin_inset Newline newline
1235 \begin_inset Newline newline
1241 \begin_inset Newline newline
1247 \begin_inset Newline newline
1255 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1259 \begin_layout Standard
1261 \begin_inset Flex Code
1264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 box containing this text is directly after this paragraph.
1272 Those of you reading the manual in \SpecialChar LyX
1273 will only see the \SpecialChar TeX
1275 Those reading a printed version of the manuals will see the actual results:
1276 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
1282 \begin_layout Standard
1286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1297 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1302 This is an example of a minipage environment.
1303 You can put nearly everything in it,
1304 even (non-floating) figures and tables.
1308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1324 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 begin{minipage}{5cm}
1341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1378 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
1384 \begin_layout Standard
1385 In addition to using \SpecialChar TeX
1387 you can also create a separate file containing some complex \SpecialChar LaTeX
1388 structure and then use
1389 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
1395 \begin_inset space ~
1403 to include your file (you should select the type
1404 \begin_inset Flex Code
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1414 We recommend that you only do this if you have a
1415 \begin_inset Flex Code
1418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1430 you'll have a big job tracking down \SpecialChar LaTeX
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 There are a few last points to emphasize:
1438 \begin_layout Itemize
1444 check if your \SpecialChar LaTeX
1448 \begin_layout Itemize
1449 Beware of reinventing the wheel.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1455 does have quite a few features tucked into it,
1456 and more are coming.
1457 Be sure to check the manuals to make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
1458 doesn't have such-and-such feature before you decide you have to do it by hand.
1460 there are numerous \SpecialChar LaTeX
1461 packages out there to do all sorts of things,
1462 from labels to envelopes to fancy multipage tables.
1464 \change_inserted 244031559 1603815732
1466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
1469 target "https://www.ctan.org/"
1475 \change_deleted 244031559 1603815732
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
1480 target "http://www.ctan.org/"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you do need to do some wild and fancy things within your document,
1492 be sure to check out a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
1493 book for assistance.
1494 There are a number of them listed in the bibliography of the
1501 \begin_layout Section
1503 and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1507 \begin_layout Subsection
1508 About the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1512 \begin_layout Standard
1513 If you already know \SpecialChar LaTeX
1515 there is no need to explain here what the preamble is good for.
1517 the following will give you some ideas—
1518 we recommend again that you consult a \SpecialChar LaTeX
1519 book for further information.
1521 you should read the points below,
1522 because they explain what you can do and what you don't need to do in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
1523 preamble of a \SpecialChar LyX
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
1529 preamble comes at the very beginning of a document,
1538 \begin_layout Itemize
1539 Declare the document class.
1541 \begin_inset Newline newline
1545 already does this for you.
1546 If you're a seasoned \SpecialChar LaTeX
1548 and you have a custom document class you want to use,
1551 Customization Manual
1553 for information on how to make \SpecialChar LyX
1557 \begin_layout Itemize
1558 Declare the usage of packages.
1560 \begin_inset Newline newline
1564 packages provide special commands,
1565 which are only available within a document when the package has been declared in the preamble.
1566 In addition to providing special commands,
1567 the inclusion of a package can change the document.
1570 \begin_inset Flex Code
1573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1579 forces all paragraphs to be indented.
1580 There are other packages for labels,
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1592 \begin_inset Newline newline
1595 There are several \SpecialChar LaTeX
1596 counters and variables that
1600 be set globally from within the preamble in order to have the desired effect.
1601 (There are variables that you can set and reset inside the document,
1602 too.) Margins are a good example of something that must be set in the preamble.
1603 Another example is the label format for lists.
1604 You can actually set these just about anywhere,
1605 but it's best to do it just once,
1606 inside the preamble.
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Declare user defined commands (with
1611 \begin_inset Flex Code
1614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1623 \begin_inset Flex Code
1626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1635 \begin_inset Newline newline
1638 These are abbreviations for \SpecialChar LaTeX
1639 commands which appear very often inside a document.
1640 Although the preamble is a good place to declare such commands,
1645 be declared anywhere (before they are used for the first time,
1647 This can be useful if there is a lot of raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
1648 code in your document,
1649 which normally should not be the case.
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 adds its own set of definitions to the preamble of the
1655 \begin_inset Flex Code
1658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1665 This makes \SpecialChar LaTeX
1666 files generated by \SpecialChar LyX
1670 \begin_layout Subsection
1671 Changing the Preamble
1674 \begin_layout Standard
1675 The commands which \SpecialChar LyX
1676 adds to the preamble of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
1678 you can't change them without patching \SpecialChar LyX
1682 add your own stuff to the preamble by selecting
1683 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1689 \begin_inset space ~
1698 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 adds anything in the
1711 \begin_inset Flex Noun
1714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1720 dialog to its own built-in preamble.
1721 Before adding your own declarations in the preamble,
1722 you should make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
1723 doesn't already support what you want to do.
1724 (Remember what we said about reinventing the wheel?) Also,
1727 make sure your preamble code is correct
1731 doesn't check it for you.
1732 If there is an error,
1733 you're likely to get an error like
1734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1738 \begin_inset Flex Code
1741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1754 If you see this error,
1755 check your preamble.
1758 \begin_layout Subsection
1762 \begin_layout Standard
1763 Here are some examples of what you can add to a preamble,
1767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
1772 \begin_layout Standard
1773 There are two variables under \SpecialChar LaTeX
1774 that control page position:
1776 \begin_inset Flex Code
1779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1788 \begin_inset Flex Code
1791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1800 Their names should be self-explanatory.
1801 These variables are useful if you think for a moment about computer labels.
1803 the size of a print medium and the area of the medium that you can actually print on aren't the same.
1805 \begin_inset Flex Code
1808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1817 \begin_inset Flex Code
1820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 The default values for
1833 \begin_inset Flex Code
1836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1845 \begin_inset Flex Code
1848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space \space{}
1869 the page isn't shifted.
1871 some DVI drivers always seem to shift the page.
1872 We have no idea why,
1873 or why the sysadmin hasn't fixed such behavior.
1874 If you're using \SpecialChar LyX
1875 on a system that you don't personally maintain,
1876 and your sysadmin is a doofus,
1878 \begin_inset Flex Code
1881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1890 \begin_inset Flex Code
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1902 Suppose your left and top margins are always 0.5
1903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1907 You can add this to the preamble:
1910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1918 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1926 \begin_layout Standard
1927 and your margins should now be correct.
1930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
1935 \begin_layout Standard
1937 suppose you wanted to print out a bunch of address labels.
1938 There's a rather nice package,
1939 available at your nearest CTAN archive,
1940 for printing sheets of labels:
1942 \begin_inset Flex Code
1945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 your system may not have this package installed by default.
1954 We leave that up to you to check.
1955 You'll also want to read the documentation for it;
1956 we're not going to do that for you.
1957 Since this is an example,
1959 we'll give you an example of how you use this package.
1962 \begin_layout Standard
1964 make sure you're using the
1965 \begin_inset Flex Code
1968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1976 you need to put the following in your preamble:
1979 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1985 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1991 \begin_layout LyX-Code
1997 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2003 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2009 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2022 This sets things up for Avery label sheets,
2024 You're now ready to print labels,
2025 but you'll need to insert \SpecialChar LaTeX
2027 placing the commands
2028 \begin_inset Flex Code
2031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2040 \begin_inset Flex Code
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 around each label text.
2052 This and other special features of
2053 \begin_inset Flex Code
2056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 are explained in its documentation.
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2067 someone may write a \SpecialChar LyX
2068 layout file to support this package directly.
2069 Maybe that someone is you.
2072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2074 Paragraph Indentation
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 Americans are trained to indent the first line of
2083 As with all of their other weird quirks,
2084 most Americans will whine and moan until they can have their way and indent the first line of all paragraphs.
2095 \begin_layout Standard
2097 this behavior isn't standard typography.
2099 you typically only indent the first line of a paragraph
2103 it follows another one.
2104 The idea behind indenting the first line of a paragraph is to distinguish neighboring paragraphs from one another.
2105 If there is no previous paragraph—
2107 if it follows a figure or is the first paragraph in a section—
2108 then there is no need for indentation.
2112 \begin_layout Standard
2113 If you're a typical American (we're still joking!),
2115 you don't care about such esoteric things;
2116 you want your indentation!
2117 Add this to the preamble:
2120 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2123 usepackage{indentfirst}
2126 \begin_layout Standard
2127 If your \SpecialChar TeX
2128 distribution isn't braindead,
2129 you'll have this package,
2130 and all of your paragraphs will get the indentation the Founding Fathers intended they should have.
2133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2138 \begin_layout Standard
2139 You can also check out the preamble of this document to get an idea of some of the advanced things you can do.
2142 \begin_layout Section
2144 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
2148 \begin_layout Standard
2149 When \SpecialChar LyX
2150 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
2152 it tells \SpecialChar LaTeX
2153 to blithely ignore any errors and keep going.
2154 It then uses the logfile from the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2155 run to do a post-mortem.
2156 After analyzing the logfile,
2158 displays a dialog listing the errors.
2159 Clicking on any one of them will take you to the position in your \SpecialChar LyX
2160 file where the error occurred.
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 Analyzing the logfile is a tough job,
2168 and \SpecialChar LyX
2169 doesn't always go to the right line.
2170 There are also cases where \SpecialChar LaTeX
2171 reports the error on one line,
2172 but the actual error is earlier.
2173 This is not unlike forgetting a closing brace in a program:
2174 You'll get an error,
2183 \begin_layout Standard
2184 Some folks also like to look at the log file directly:
2185 It is available from
2186 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2192 \begin_inset space ~
2201 There are some fairly common error messages and warnings.
2202 We'll cover those here.
2203 You should look at a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
2204 book for a complete listing.
2207 \begin_layout Itemize
2208 \begin_inset Flex Code
2211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2218 \begin_inset Newline newline
2221 Anything beginning with these words is a warning message for the purpose of
2222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2229 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2231 You'll get messages like this if you added or changed cross-references or bibliography entries,
2234 is trying to tell you that you need to make another run.
2235 You can by-and-large ignore these.
2238 \begin_layout Itemize
2239 \begin_inset Flex Code
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2249 \begin_inset Newline newline
2252 Another warning message,
2253 this time about fonts which \SpecialChar LaTeX
2255 The rest of the message will often say something about a replacement font that \SpecialChar LaTeX
2257 You can safely ignore these,
2261 \begin_layout Itemize
2262 \begin_inset Flex Code
2265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2274 \begin_inset Newline newline
2283 It seems to generate at least one of these messages for just about any document you write.
2284 They are warnings about lines that were too long and run past the right margin.
2285 This happens if \SpecialChar LaTeX
2286 does not find a reasonable way to break the lines (notoriously often with typewriter font,
2287 since this does not allow for automatic break points).
2289 this is unnoticeable in the final output.
2290 (It can be just a point or two.) Sometimes,
2292 the lines run rather visibly into the margin;
2293 something you will not want to have in your final print.
2295 \begin_inset Newline newline
2298 There are several global ways to try to minimize the overfull lines.
2301 Enable micro-typographic extensions
2305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2309 might already improve things a lot.
2312 code such as the following in
2314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2315 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2318 usually reduces the overfull lines drastically (we use this in the preamble of this document):
2322 \begin_layout LyX-Code
2326 \begin_inset Newline newline
2332 \begin_inset Newline newline
2337 emergencystretch 1.5em
2338 \begin_inset Newline newline
2346 \begin_layout Standard
2349 you eventually have to rewrite the text to get the line breaking right.
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 For more information,
2356 \begin_inset Flex URL
2359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-overfull.html
2374 \begin_layout Standard
2376 you should check the respective lines,
2377 at least for the final version of your document.
2378 Your eyes will tell you if there's a problem with something that's too wide.
2382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2383 You can also enable the `draft' option in
2384 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2395 and then \SpecialChar LaTeX
2396 will draw a black box in the margin of lines that are overfull.
2405 \begin_layout Itemize
2406 \begin_inset Flex Code
2409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 \begin_inset Newline newline
2421 Not quite as common as its cousin.
2422 This happens again if \SpecialChar LaTeX
2423 does not find a reasonable break point and consequently generates too loose lines.
2424 As with the overfull lines,
2425 you should check if this is a visible problem.
2428 \begin_layout Itemize
2429 \begin_inset Flex Code
2432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2441 \begin_inset Flex Code
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2453 \begin_inset Newline newline
2456 Warnings about troubles breaking the page.
2458 just look at the output.
2459 Your eyes will tell you where something has gone wrong.
2462 \begin_layout Itemize
2463 \begin_inset Flex Code
2466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2469 \begin_inset Quotes els
2473 \begin_inset Quotes ers
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2493 isn't installed on this system.
2494 This usually appears because some package your document needs isn't installed.
2495 If you didn't touch the preamble or didn't use the
2496 \begin_inset Flex Code
2499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2508 then one of the packages \SpecialChar LyX
2509 tried to load is missing.
2511 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2515 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
2522 to get a list of packages that \SpecialChar LyX
2524 This file is updated whenever you reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
2526 \begin_inset Flex Noun
2529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2530 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2536 ) and tells you which packages have been detected and what they do.
2537 \begin_inset Newline newline
2541 \begin_inset Flex Code
2544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 command and the package in question isn't installed,
2553 then you'll need to install it yourself.
2556 \begin_layout Itemize
2557 \begin_inset Flex Code
2560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2568 \begin_inset Newline newline
2571 Error messages beginning with this are trying to tell you that you specified a bad or undefined option to a package.
2572 Check the package's documentation.
2575 \begin_layout Itemize
2576 \begin_inset Flex Code
2579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2580 Undefined control sequence
2586 \begin_inset Newline newline
2589 If you've inserted \SpecialChar LaTeX
2590 code into your document,
2592 you'll get one of these.
2593 You may have forgotten to load a package.
2595 this error message usually means that you used an undefined command.
2599 \begin_layout Standard
2600 There are other error and warning messages.
2601 Some are self-explanatory.
2602 These are usually \SpecialChar LaTeX
2604 Others are downright cryptic.
2605 These are usually \SpecialChar TeX
2611 what they mean or how to decipher them.
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 There's a general sequence you should follow if you get error messages:
2619 \begin_layout Enumerate
2620 Look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
2621 code you inserted for typos.
2624 \begin_layout Enumerate
2625 If there are no typos,
2626 check that you used the command(s) correctly.
2629 \begin_layout Enumerate
2630 If you get a bunch of error boxes piled up at the very top of the document—
2631 and especially if you see a
2632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Flex Code
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2652 it means that there are errors in the preamble.
2653 Start debugging your preamble.
2656 \begin_layout Enumerate
2657 If you didn't add anything to the preamble and didn't add any \SpecialChar LaTeX
2658 code to the document,
2659 the first suspect is your \SpecialChar LaTeX
2660 distribution itself.
2661 Check for missing packages and install them.
2664 \begin_layout Enumerate
2666 so there are no missing packages.
2667 Did you use any of the fine-tuning options in \SpecialChar LyX
2675 like trying to manually insert lots of
2676 \begin_inset Flex Code
2679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2681 \change_deleted 177693 1654669036
2683 \change_inserted 177693 1654669038
2687 \begin_inset space ~
2691 \change_deleted 177693 1654669040
2693 \change_inserted 177693 1654669041
2703 \begin_inset Flex Code
2706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2714 \begin_inset Flex Code
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Did you try to kludge something together with these instead of using the appropriate paragraph environment?
2727 \begin_layout Enumerate
2729 you didn't use any of the fine-tuning options,
2730 you played by the rules.
2731 Did you try to pull a fancy maneuver?
2732 Did you do something funky inside a table or an equation,
2733 like inserting a graphic into a table cell?
2736 \begin_layout Enumerate
2737 Do you have long sections of text where \SpecialChar LaTeX
2738 cannot find a place to break a line?
2741 is rather strict about how much extra inter-word spacing it will add in order to break a line.
2743 you should rework the paragraph to avoid the problem.
2746 \begin_layout Enumerate
2747 Did you go overboard with the nesting?
2749 (currently) doesn't check to make sure you're in the limits for nesting environments.
2750 If you nested a bunch of environments to the
2751 \begin_inset Formula $17^{\mathrm{th}}$
2756 (The limit in \SpecialChar LaTeX
2760 \begin_layout Enumerate
2762 you didn't get any error messages,
2763 but your output looks awful.
2764 If you have a table or figure that's too wide or long for the page,
2769 \begin_layout Enumerate
2770 rescale the figure so it fits.
2773 \begin_layout Enumerate
2774 trim down the table so it fits.
2778 \begin_layout Enumerate
2779 If something else is wrong with the output,
2780 and you didn't try to pull anything fancy or kludge the fine-tuning options,
2781 we're not sure what's wrong.
2784 \begin_layout Standard
2785 If all this doesn't help—
2791 you might have found a bug in \SpecialChar LyX
2796 \begin_layout Chapter
2798 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345271
2802 \begin_layout Standard
2804 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345272
2811 originally offered four standard document classes,
2815 but individuals and organizations,
2816 most notably the American Mathematical Society in the early days,
2817 have made many contributions to extending the range of document classes.
2818 In this chapter we summarize the main externally maintained classes,
2819 some of which are marked “Unavailable:” in the pull-down
2822 \begin_inset space ~
2836 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
2841 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2843 \begin_inset space ~
2848 dialog and which you will need to install as described in the
2850 Installing New Document Classes
2856 manual if you want to use them.
2860 \begin_layout Section
2862 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439533
2863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2865 name "sec:Collections"
2872 \begin_layout Subsection
2874 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2877 name "subsec:AMS-LaTeX-(American-Mathematical"
2881 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
2882 (American Mathematical Society)
2885 \begin_layout Standard
2887 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2888 The \SpecialChar LyX
2889 supported document classes
2897 are maintained by the Society;
2898 use of their features is described in the Math manual and on their website
2899 \begin_inset Flex URL
2902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2904 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2906 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
2914 The following summary was originally provided by
2921 \change_inserted -712698321 1673082716
2923 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345298
2926 and the \SpecialChar LyX
2930 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345297
2933 AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2939 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345297
2947 Richard Kimberly Heck
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
2959 \begin_layout Standard
2961 The AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
2962 layouts are set up to conform to suggested styles for mathematical papers to be submitted to American Mathematical Society publications.
2963 The layouts are not tailored to a specific journal,
2965 You should refer to the AMS documentation for specific instructions for each journal (usually it will entail only changing a single line in the \SpecialChar TeX
2967 That documentation is available on the Web at
2968 \begin_inset Flex URL
2971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2979 \begin_inset Flex URL
2982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amslatex/
2990 These layouts are appropriate,
2992 for any mathematical writing.
2996 \begin_layout Standard
2998 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083001
3000 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083002
3003 basic AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
3008 \begin_layout Itemize
3010 The standard AMS article format
3011 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345333
3015 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
3016 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
3017 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
3018 American Mathematical Society (AMS)
3025 \begin_layout Itemize
3027 the standard AMS book (really,
3029 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345366
3033 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
3034 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
3035 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
3036 American Mathematical Society (AMS)
3041 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345369
3045 \begin_layout Itemize
3047 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345383
3049 the standard AMS proceedings format.
3052 \begin_layout Standard
3054 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345383
3056 only supports the first two natively;
3059 Installing New Document Classes
3065 manual if you want to use
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 The layouts themselves contain only the minimum necessary to use the AMS classes.
3076 contain any of the `theorem' environments used for setting theorems,
3079 These are contained,
3082 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345416
3084 \begin_inset Flex Code
3087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345416
3102 which is loaded by default when you select one of the AMS classes.
3103 (It can also be used with other classes and can be removed,
3104 if you would rather use something else.) Less commonly used environments are in the
3105 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345436
3107 \begin_inset Flex Code
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3111 Theorems (AMS-Extended)
3117 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345436
3120 AMS Theorems (Extended)
3125 which must be loaded manually.
3128 \begin_layout Standard
3130 theorems and the like are numbered consecutively throughout the document,
3131 but this may be modified by loading the module
3132 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345461
3134 \begin_inset Flex Code
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3138 Theorems (Order by Section)
3144 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345461
3147 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
3153 \begin_inset Flex Code
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3164 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345479
3166 \begin_inset Flex Code
3169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 Theorems (Order by Chapter)
3176 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345480
3179 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
3184 These will number the results as
3185 \begin_inset Formula $n.m$
3189 where the first number refers to the section (or chapter) and the second refers to the total number of results so far in that section (or chapter).
3190 Many environments are also available unnumbered.
3191 These are indicated by an asterisk at the end.
3192 If you happen to want
3198 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345498
3200 \begin_inset Flex Code
3203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3210 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345498
3213 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
3217 provides that option.
3220 \begin_layout Standard
3221 Note that these modules do not
3225 to be used with the AMS classes.
3226 It is perfectly possible to use the
3227 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345520
3229 \begin_inset Flex Code
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3239 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345520
3247 and the others mentioned,
3250 \begin_inset Flex Code
3253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083855
3257 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083855
3258 Article (Standard Class)
3267 \begin_inset Flex Code
3270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083858
3274 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083862
3275 Report (Standard Class)
3284 \begin_inset Flex Code
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 \change_deleted -712698321 1673083819
3291 \change_inserted -712698321 1673083822
3303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3304 What these layouts provide
3307 \begin_layout Standard
3308 There is a long list of included environments provided by these layouts.
3309 In AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 an opportunity to define an unlimited variety of `theorem' environments.
3315 the AMS recommends the environments that are available in \SpecialChar LyX
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 The following environments—
3322 as well as the standard environments,
3324 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3335 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3357 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3368 \begin_inset Flex Noun
3371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3379 \begin_inset Flex Code
3382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 \begin_inset Flex Code
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3401 \begin_layout Description
3402 Address This should be the author's permanent address.
3405 \begin_layout Description
3407 \begin_inset space ~
3410 Address This should be the author's temporary address at the time of submission,
3411 if different from the Address.
3414 \begin_layout Description
3415 Email Author's e-mail address
3418 \begin_layout Description
3419 URL Author's Web address,
3423 \begin_layout Description
3424 Keywords Key words or phrases used to identify specific topics discussed in the paper.
3427 \begin_layout Description
3428 Subjectclass These refer to the AMS Subject Classifications,
3429 published and described in
3431 Mathematical Reviews
3434 These are also available online at the AMS cites listed above.
3437 \begin_layout Description
3441 \begin_layout Description
3445 \begin_layout Description
3449 \begin_layout Standard
3450 The following environments are provided by both the
3451 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345566
3453 \begin_inset Flex Code
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3463 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345566
3471 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345580
3473 \begin_inset Flex Code
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345580
3491 in the latter case in both
3492 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084072
3496 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084073
3500 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084075
3504 \change_deleted -712698321 1673084077
3508 These same environments are provided only in the starred versions by the
3509 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345596
3511 \begin_inset Flex Code
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345596
3525 \change_inserted -712698321 1673084060
3533 \begin_layout Theorem
3534 This is typically used for the statements of major results.
3538 \begin_layout Corollary*
3539 This is used for statements which follow fairly directly from previous statements.
3541 these can be major results.
3546 These are smaller results needed to prove other statements.
3549 \begin_layout Proposition
3550 These are less major results which (hopefully) add to the general theory being discussed.
3553 \begin_layout Conjecture
3554 These are statements provided without justification,
3555 which the author does not know how to prove,
3556 but which seem to be true (to the author,
3560 \begin_layout Definition*
3561 Guess what this is for.
3562 The font is different for this environment than for the previous ones.
3566 \begin_layout Example*
3567 Used for examples illustrating proven results.
3570 \begin_layout Problem
3571 It's not really known what this is for.
3572 You should figure it out.
3575 \begin_layout Exercise*
3576 Write a description for this one.
3579 \begin_layout Remark
3580 This environment is also a type of theorem,
3581 usually a lesser sort of observation.
3584 \begin_layout Claim*
3585 Often used in the course of giving a proof of a larger result.
3590 these are used to break up long arguments,
3591 using specific instances of some condition.
3596 The numbering scheme for cases is on its own,
3597 not together with other numbered statements.
3602 At the end of this environment,
3603 a QED symbol (usually a square,
3604 but it can vary with different styles) is placed.
3605 If you want to have other environments within this one—
3608 and have the QED symbol appear only after them,
3609 then the other environments need to be nested within the proof environment.
3612 Nesting Environments
3618 for information on nesting.
3623 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345651
3624 Used in a way similar to Proposition,
3625 though perhaps lower on the scale.
3628 \begin_layout Standard
3629 And these environments are provided by
3630 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345684
3632 \begin_inset Flex Code
3635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 Theorems (AMS-Extended)
3642 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345689
3645 AMS Theorems (Extended
3652 \begin_layout Criterion*
3653 A required condition.
3656 \begin_layout Algorithm*
3657 A general procedure to be used.
3660 \begin_layout Axiom*
3661 This is a property or statement taken as true within the system being discussed.
3664 \begin_layout Condition*
3665 Sometimes used to state a condition assumed within the present context of discussion.
3669 Similar to a Remark.
3672 \begin_layout Notation*
3673 Used for the explanation of,
3678 \begin_layout Summary
3679 Do we really need to tell you?
3683 \begin_layout Acknowledgement*
3687 \begin_layout Conclusion*
3688 Sometimes used at the end of a long train of argument.
3689 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345729
3695 \change_deleted 564990737 1672345638
3696 Used in a way similar to Proposition,
3697 though perhaps lower on the scale.
3698 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345720
3702 \begin_layout Assumption*
3704 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3708 \begin_layout Question*
3710 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3714 \begin_layout Standard
3716 \change_inserted 564990737 1672345721
3717 There are ten more Maths modules available including several offering options ordered on
3719 (Numbered by Type \SpecialChar ldots
3727 \begin_layout Standard
3729 the AMS classes automatically provide the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
3730 and AMS fonts packages.
3731 They need to be available on your system in order to use these environments.
3734 \begin_layout Subsection
3736 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3739 name "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
3746 \begin_layout Standard
3748 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3749 The “Extra font sizes” collection provides the document classes
3752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3755 (with extra font sizes)
3761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3764 (with extra font sizes)
3770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3773 (with extra font sizes)
3778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3781 (with extra font sizes)
3801 document classes respectively but offer the additional
3807 \begin_inset space ~
3820 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
3825 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3831 \begin_layout Subsection
3833 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3837 \begin_layout Standard
3839 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3840 The document classes
3843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3866 document classes to facilitate the use of Hebrew in \SpecialChar LyX
3870 \begin_layout Subsection
3872 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3875 name "subsec:Japanese"
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3884 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3885 The document classes
3886 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089024
3890 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089025
3892 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089025
3894 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3900 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089027
3902 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3909 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089041
3911 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089041
3913 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3919 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089044
3921 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3922 Standard Class Vertical Writing)
3926 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089041
3930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3933 (Japanese Standard Class)
3934 \change_inserted -712698321 1673088992
3935 Japanese Article (Standard Class)
3936 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3941 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089053
3945 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089053
3947 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089064
3949 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3955 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089067
3957 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3964 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089073
3966 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089270
3968 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3974 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089077
3976 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3977 Standard Class Vertical Writing)
3981 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089083
3985 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089083
3987 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
3989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
3993 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089087
3995 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4000 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089094
4004 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089094
4006 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089094
4008 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4014 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089097
4016 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4020 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089104
4024 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089104
4026 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4032 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089107
4034 \change_inserted 564990737 1671383236
4037 provide document classes for the Japanese language.
4040 \begin_layout Subsection
4042 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429136
4043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4045 name "subsec:KOMA-Script"
4052 \begin_layout Standard
4054 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429136
4064 and the \SpecialChar LyX
4066 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429136
4070 \begin_layout Standard
4072 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429136
4080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4082 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429161
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4088 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429162
4089 The KOMA-Script collection of document classes is a development of the Script classes created by Frank Neukam in the early 1990s;
4090 it was formally launched with the addition of a letter class in 1994.
4092 a second letter class has been added.
4093 Frank Neukam's classes were inspired by the principles of typography and this has been fully integrated into the design of the KOMA-Script classes.
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The \SpecialChar LyX
4102 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089779
4105 article (koma-script)
4106 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089784
4113 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089790
4116 report (koma-script)
4117 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089794
4124 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089790
4132 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089771
4139 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089799
4143 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089802
4145 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089802
4149 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089811
4158 correspond to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4180 \begin_inset space ~
4183 of the Koma-Script family.
4184 They are replacements for the standard document classes
4204 and fit better to European typography conventions in a number of points.
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4209 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429262
4210 Standard character size is
4211 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429263
4212 The base character sizes when you select a KOMA-Script class are
4215 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089877
4218 article (koma-script)
4219 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089877
4226 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089886
4229 report (koma-script)
4230 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089886
4237 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089893
4241 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089893
4243 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429267
4250 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089903
4253 letter (koma-script)
4254 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089903
4262 \begin_layout Itemize
4264 labels of the description environment,
4265 and a number of elements of the
4266 \change_deleted -712698321 1673089925
4269 letter (koma-script)
4270 \change_inserted -712698321 1673089925
4275 document class are set in a bold sans serif font.
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 There is a big difference between the bold sans serif old cm fonts and new ec fonts,
4281 especially in the appearance of headings.
4283 the ec bold sans serif fonts look a bit thin.
4284 Here the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4293 helps to produce the
4294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4301 appearance when using the ec fonts.
4306 The numbering of chapter headings is made in the same way as the numbering of section headings,
4307 that is without the extra line
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4311 Chapter\SpecialChar ldots
4313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4318 the appearance of the headings can be modified by using a number of options (in \SpecialChar LyX
4319 to be entered in the field
4322 \begin_inset space ~
4329 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
4336 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429310
4339 The main means in the Koma-Script document classes to design the type area are the options
4347 (in \SpecialChar LyX
4348 to be entered in the extra class options field in the dialog
4350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4354 They make a clearer modification of page margins possible as do the options of the dialog
4356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4361 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4362 The layout of a KOMA-Script page follows one of two traditional typesetting conventions based on dividing the page into strips or drawing a circle.
4363 The default is to imagine that a page is divided horizontally and vertically into strips and allocate strips to the margins leaving the unused strips for the text area.
4364 You can change the sizes of the margins by changing the factor by which the page is divided into strips;
4365 the default for an A4 page is 9 and increasing this factor will produce increasingly narrower strips and therefore narrower margins.
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4372 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4373 Whatever the factor,
4374 two strips are allocated to the outer and bottom margins of a two-sided document and one strip to the inner and top margins,
4375 leaving a text area occupying around half the page.
4376 Since most two-sided documents have a binding,
4377 this can make the inner margins appear too narrow;
4378 so you can apply a binding correction to the page which is deducted before the size of the strips is calculated.
4382 \begin_layout Standard
4384 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4385 The main means in the Koma-Script document classes to design the type area are the options
4395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4397 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
4398 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
4405 \begin_layout Standard
4407 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4409 the binding correction is 7.5mm which is added in the form
4416 \begin_inset space ~
4419 options\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 To change the factor to 11,
4433 to the comma separated list of entries in the
4444 \begin_inset space ~
4450 If you want the default value of this factor for a page size other than A4,
4458 \begin_layout Standard
4460 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429310
4461 To use the circle method of calculating the page layout,
4472 \begin_layout Itemize
4473 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
4474 document classes of the Koma-Script family define a number of additional commands.
4475 Those part of it which makes sense in \SpecialChar LyX
4476 is implemented in corresponding paragraph types.
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Detailed descriptions of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4481 document classes of the Koma-Script family can be found in the Koma-Script documentation
4492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4494 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4499 name "subsec:article-(KOMA-Script),-report"
4504 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090826
4507 article (KOMA-Script)
4508 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090826
4512 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4517 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090830
4518 report (KOMA-Script)
4519 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090840
4523 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429358
4528 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090835
4530 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090844
4534 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429367
4537 article (koma-script),
4538 report (koma-script),
4539 and book (koma-script)
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 The document classes
4546 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090858
4549 article (koma-script)
4550 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090858
4557 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090862
4560 report (koma-script)
4561 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090869
4568 \change_deleted -712698321 1673090866
4576 \change_inserted -712698321 1673090874
4581 are implemented in the layout files
4597 They contain all the paragraph types of the corresponding standard document classes
4614 with the exception of the \SpecialChar LyX
4620 which is replaced by the new
4624 -type having the same functionality.
4629 -Type there is a number of new paragraph types added.
4636 letter (koma-script)
4641 \begin_layout Itemize
4664 additionally inserting an entry in the table of contents.
4673 are not contained in
4675 article (koma-script)
4680 \begin_layout Itemize
4701 additionally clearing running heads.
4708 article (koma-script)
4714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4727 report (koma-script)
4730 but since this is identical to
4735 is has not been implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
4744 \begin_layout Itemize
4750 generates a heading directly above the following paragraph in the standard character size without affecting the structure of the document.
4753 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 are special captions which respect the different space settings needed for captions placed above or below an element (if you follow strict typographic rules,
4763 you might want to place table captions always above the table).
4764 You can also use the class option
4782 You need at least Koma-Script version 2.8q to use this.
4785 \begin_layout Itemize
4791 can be used to set a bonmot,
4793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4797 \begin_inset space \space{}
4800 at the beginning of a chapter.
4801 If you use the optional argument (
4803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
4805 \begin_inset space ~
4811 you can insert the dictum's author there.
4812 Dictum and author are separated by a line.
4813 You need at least Koma-Script version 2.8q to use this.
4820 article (koma-script)
4825 \begin_layout Standard
4826 The following types,
4827 together with the standard types
4842 form the title area of the document.
4843 They must be entered ahead of the first
4844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4856 The corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4857 commands must appear before the
4868 When such a type is used more than once,
4869 the latter usage overwrites the former one,
4871 for every type only the latest usage is valid.
4872 The order of the different types however has,
4888 no effect on the appearance of the produced document.
4891 \begin_layout Itemize
4897 produces a centered paragraph above the ordinary title (
4911 ) for the subject of the document.
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 produces a centered paragraph below the ordinary title (
4934 ) for the publishers' name.
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 report (koma-script)
4951 produces a centered paragraph on its own page behind the title page,
4954 article (koma-script)
4956 produces a centered paragraph below the ordinary title (
4978 \begin_layout Itemize
4984 produces a left aligned paragraph above the ordinary title (
5003 ) for a document`s head.
5006 \begin_layout Itemize
5012 produces in a double-sided print in
5014 report (koma-script)
5020 a left-aligned paragraph at the top of the title page`s back or has no effect in a single-sided print or in
5022 article (koma-script)
5027 \begin_layout Itemize
5033 produces in a double-sided print in
5035 report (koma-script)
5041 a left-aligned paragraph at the bottom of the title page`s back or has no effect in a single-sided print or in
5043 article (koma-script)
5048 \begin_layout Itemize
5055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5062 page ahead of the actual document containing a paragraph without special formatting.
5065 \begin_layout Standard
5067 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5068 KOMA-Script offers a wide range of
5075 \begin_inset space ~
5085 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
5090 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5092 \begin_inset space ~
5097 dialog which you can apply to the whole document,
5101 \begin_layout Description
5103 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5110 which produces a PDF with a small black box at the end any line in which a formatting error occurs;
5111 the default setting is
5116 \begin_layout Description
5118 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5125 which may take the values
5139 the first and last adjust the sizes of the headings to take account of page sizes where the default values may not be suitable
5142 \begin_layout Description
5144 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5151 which may take the values
5165 the first leaves it up to KOMA-Script to add periods after chapter,
5168 the second forces the addition of periods and third suppresses them
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5173 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5174 and the math options:
5177 \begin_layout Description
5179 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5186 which causes equations to be numbered on the left rather than on the right,
5190 \begin_layout Description
5192 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5199 which causes equations to be left justified rather than centered.
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5205 It also provides commands to affect the output of the document independently of the standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
5206 commands and packages;
5208 if you want your captions in bold add
5211 \begin_layout Standard
5213 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5218 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
5223 \begin_layout Standard
5225 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5231 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
5238 \SpecialChar menuseparator
5243 \begin_inset space ~
5248 ) and the problem is solved.
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5253 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5254 If you are writing a book,
5255 it is normal to have the preliminary pages numbered in Roman numerals and the Chapters in this part unnumbered.
5256 If you use the Chapter* environment,
5257 your Foreword and Preface will not appear in the Table of Contents;
5258 to make them to appear in the Table of contents,
5259 you need to use Chapter environments and add the \SpecialChar TeX
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5265 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5273 \begin_layout Standard
5275 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5276 at the very start of the book (not in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5280 \begin_layout Standard
5282 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5292 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5293 before the first chapter of the body of the text.
5295 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092640
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5306 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5307 You may also want to have some unnumbered Chapter environments at the end of the book after the Appendices,
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5314 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5315 Appendices are normally “numbered” with letters.
5320 If you use the Chapter* environment,
5321 they will not appear in the Table of Contents;
5322 so add the \SpecialChar TeX
5326 \begin_layout Standard
5328 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429680
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5338 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429682
5339 before the first of these headings and use the Chapter environment.
5340 These commands will have no effect on the numbering in \SpecialChar LyX
5342 only on the PDF output where the headings will be unnumbered and appear in the Table of Contents.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5346 The layout files for the document classes
5348 article (koma-script)
5353 report (koma-script)
5365 This is thought of as a place to define your own types.
5370 in your personal layout directory and edit the file!
5371 \change_deleted 564990737 1672430255
5375 \begin_layout Standard
5377 \change_deleted 564990737 1672430255
5378 letter (koma-script)
5381 \begin_layout Description
5383 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5385 This section discusses the obsolete
5387 KOMA-Script-Letter (v.
5388 \begin_inset space ~
5394 which is not even included anymore in recent KOMA releases.
5395 Please refer to the next section for the current KOMA-Script-Letter class (v.
5396 \begin_inset space ~
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5405 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5408 letter (koma-script)
5410 is implemented in the layout file
5415 It contains all the paragraph types of the corresponding standard document class
5421 with the exception of the \SpecialChar LyX
5436 which is replaced by the new
5443 in contrast to the standard document class,
5466 there are a number of new letter specific types.
5469 \begin_layout Standard
5471 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5472 The appearance of the letter produced by this document class can be controlled by a number of \SpecialChar LaTeX
5474 which you can put in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 the standard appearance of the letter`s heading,
5482 consisting of name and address,
5483 is quite self-willed.
5485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5492 heading is produced by the following \SpecialChar LaTeX
5493 commands in the preamble:
5496 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5506 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5532 \begin_layout LyX-Code
5552 A detailed German description of such \SpecialChar LaTeX
5553 commands can be found in the Koma-Script documentation
5559 the letter's author can produce his personal letter layout.
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5573 define the beginning of the letter and must be used in every letter.
5574 To emphasize them in the \SpecialChar LyX
5576 they are marked with the letter
5586 \begin_inset space ~
5590 It is possible to write any number of letters in one file.
5595 type produces a new letter using the same addressee and a
5599 type produces a new addressee.
5619 are ordinary paragraph types and can also be used several times in one and the same letter.
5622 \begin_layout Itemize
5624 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5630 produces a paragraph for the addressee and implicitly defines the beginning of the letter.
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5635 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5641 produces a paragraph for the form of address and implicitly produces a new letter.
5644 \begin_layout Itemize
5646 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5652 produces a paragraph for a close.
5655 \begin_layout Itemize
5657 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5663 produces a paragraph for a postscript.
5666 \begin_layout Itemize
5668 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5674 produces a paragraph for a distribution list.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5685 produces a paragraph for enclosures.
5688 \begin_layout Standard
5690 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5740 are input types provided with a label to enter information,
5741 which will be processed by the document class.
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5746 It could be seen as a matter of inconsequence,
5755 described above are not such input types as well.
5756 Because of the special meaning of those types,
5758 I have implemented them as ordinary paragraph types with a one letter mark in the left margin.
5760 it would affect my feeling of symmetry,
5769 type had such a serious different appearance.
5774 The types must be used ahead of the corresponding
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5783 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5784 An implementation of these types in a WYSIWYG fashion does not seem to make sense,
5785 because the real appearance of the produced letter does not only depend on the usage of the particular type,
5786 but also on other factors.
5788 a signature entered in the
5792 type will in the standard behavior appear in the produced letter only,
5793 when in the same letter also a
5798 The entered value of the
5802 type will in the standard behavior not appear in the produced letter at all.
5803 The possibility to design the letter`s heading freely is already indicated in a footnote above.
5806 \begin_layout Standard
5808 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5809 The input types can also be used as empty paragraphs.
5811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
5815 \begin_inset space \space{}
5827 type is not used at all,
5828 in the standard behavior the value of the
5832 type is used as signature,
5838 no signature value is defined.
5841 \begin_layout Standard
5843 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5844 By using the input types it is possible to write a letter template,
5845 containing filled input types with your personal dates (name,
5847 etc.) and empty input types for other dates you want to enter.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5852 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5859 in the standard behavior appears as a centered paragraph in small caps in the letter`s heading.
5862 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5871 in the standard behavior appears below the
5885 type appears instead.
5888 \begin_layout Itemize
5890 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5897 in the standard behavior appears in a centered paragraph in the letter`s heading below the sender's name.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5902 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5908 sender's telephone number,
5909 in the standard behavior only sets the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5921 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5927 place of the letter`s making.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5938 date of the letter`s making.
5948 in the standard behavior,
5949 produce the place and the date in a right-aligned line below the addressee's field.
5955 neither place nor date appear,
5956 independent of the value of the
5966 the date of the letter `s production is used.
5969 \begin_layout Itemize
5971 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5977 sender`s back address,
5978 in the standard behavior appears above the addressee's field in a small sans serif font.
5981 \begin_layout Itemize
5983 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
5989 special mail information,
5990 in the standard behavior appears underlined above the addressee's field below the back address.
5993 \begin_layout Itemize
5995 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6001 additional information,
6002 in the standard behavior appears on right side below the addressee`s field.
6005 \begin_layout Itemize
6007 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6014 in the standard behavior appears in a big,
6016 sans serif font above the subject.
6019 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6027 the letter's subject,
6028 in the standard behavior appears in a bold font above the
6035 \begin_layout Standard
6037 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6062 produce a business letter like line above the
6066 line containing the fields
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6130 business letter types
6131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6139 type however does not appear,
6140 but only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6148 The ordinary output of place and date in a right-aligned line below the addressee`s field is suppressed.
6149 The types are implemented as input types provided with a label and must be used ahead of the corresponding
6156 \begin_layout Itemize
6158 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6167 \begin_layout Itemize
6169 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6178 \begin_layout Itemize
6180 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6189 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6200 \begin_layout Itemize
6202 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429749
6213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6215 \change_deleted 564990737 1672429773
6216 The new letter class:
6217 letter (koma-script v.2)
6218 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6222 name "subsec:The-new-letter"
6226 The new letter class:
6228 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092709
6230 \change_deleted -712698321 1673092710
6232 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092710
6234 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6236 \change_deleted -712698321 1673092713
6238 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092714
6240 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6243 \change_inserted -712698321 1673092715
6245 \change_inserted 564990737 1672429774
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6257 \begin_layout Standard
6258 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
6264 \begin_layout Standard
6266 Koma-Script version 2.8 has introduced a new letter class
6270 which supersedes the now unsupported
6276 on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6278 a completely new interface and is not compatible with the old class.
6282 though it is recommended you use the new class.
6285 \begin_layout Standard
6286 This class covers the same functionality as
6288 letter (koma-script),
6296 (receiver's address,
6316 will start a new letter (i.
6317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6321 \begin_inset space \space{}
6324 you can write several letters per document).
6325 New elements are sender's
6344 and the possibility to use a
6350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6357 The biggest improvement is,
6359 that the letter's layout is configurable to meet almost any needs.
6360 This can be done via the preamble or with a special style file (Letter Class Option,
6366 that will be read in as a class option.
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6371 The KOMA package comes with some default
6382 file that follows german typesetting rules,
6387 that provides the default layout of the old
6392 The latter can be loaded with the class option
6399 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
6400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6409 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617922
6417 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617938
6418 that is included in \SpecialChar LyX
6420 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617997
6426 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6439 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
6440 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
6441 KOMA-Script Letter (V.2)
6446 A detailed description is to be found in the Koma-Script documentation (
6453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6457 \begin_layout Standard
6458 Visualizing the Koma-Script document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
6460 the \SpecialChar LyX
6461 internals cause some problems.
6464 \begin_layout Itemize
6465 The chapter number of a
6469 type appears on a line of its own above the chapter heading instead of appearing in the same line ahead of it.
6470 The cause for that is the \SpecialChar LyX
6471 internal behavior for the labeltype
6478 \begin_layout Itemize
6479 The headings of the types
6488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6497 but not in the \SpecialChar LyX
6500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6514 \begin_layout Itemize
6519 document class appear in a skip separation mode,
6521 This is the standard behavior,
6522 no special \SpecialChar LaTeX
6523 commands are needed for that.
6526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6529 dialog the corresponding radio button indicates
6538 value always has the effect that extra \SpecialChar LaTeX
6539 commands are inserted in the document to produce the gap,
6540 which is not what is wanted in this case.
6543 \begin_layout Subsection
6545 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743555
6546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6548 name "subsec:Polish-M.W.collection"
6553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6557 \begin_inset space \space{}
6561 \change_deleted 564990737 1670924933
6563 book (mwbk) and report (mwrep)
6564 \begin_inset Argument status
6567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6582 \begin_layout Standard
6588 \begin_layout Standard
6589 The \SpecialChar LyX
6607 correspond to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6623 They are replacements for the standard document classes
6638 and fit better to Polish typography conventions in a number of points.
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6646 \begin_layout Itemize
6647 Unnumbered titles (with star,
6649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6653 \begin_inset space \space{}
6660 ) are added into table of contents,
6663 \begin_layout Itemize
6664 Additional page styles:
6668 \begin_layout Description
6669 uheadings header with separated lines,
6672 \begin_layout Description
6673 myheadings custom header,
6674 contents headers via commands:
6690 \begin_layout Description
6691 myuheadings custom header with separated lines,
6694 \begin_layout Description
6695 outer page number is placed on outer side of page
6699 \begin_layout Itemize
6704 \begin_layout Description
6705 rmheadings serif titles —
6709 \begin_layout Description
6710 sfheadings sansserif titles,
6713 \begin_layout Description
6714 authortitle on title page first placed is author next title —
6718 \begin_layout Description
6719 titleauthor on title page first placed is title next author,
6722 \begin_layout Description
6723 withmarginpar reserve place on page for margins.
6727 \begin_layout Subsection
6729 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6733 \begin_layout Standard
6735 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652245
6736 The document classes
6739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6761 Detailed information about these document classes can be found in
6763 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
6764 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
6765 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
6770 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
6771 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
6772 Handouts\SpecialChar menuseparator
6778 \begin_layout Section
6780 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439534
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6786 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794710
6787 See also the document classes in the Collections (section
6788 \begin_inset space ~
6792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6794 reference "sec:Collections"
6802 \begin_layout Subsection
6804 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6810 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6816 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
6820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6822 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6826 \begin_layout Standard
6828 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6829 This section describes how \SpecialChar LyX
6830 can be used to write articles for submission to the scientific journal
6832 Astronomy and Astrophysics
6835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
6838 target "http://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/aa-package.zip"
6843 ) using Version 9.1 of the document class
6848 information about it is available at
6849 \begin_inset Flex URL
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6856 https://www.aanda.org/for-authors/latex-issues/texnical-background-information
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6868 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6869 A manual comes together with the package and should be consulted before installing this document class as described in the
6871 Installing New Document Classe
6881 \begin_layout Standard
6883 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6889 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6890 Please note that the publisher of the journal was changed from Springer to EDP Sciences starting January 1,
6892 That change also involved some slight changes to the style files,
6893 namely the removal of the thesaurus command.
6894 If you have an older version installed,
6896 For information about compatibility with the old (version 4) layout,
6897 please refer to the comments in
6900 Dir/layouts/aapaper.layout
6910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6912 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6916 \begin_layout Standard
6918 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617129
6919 It is recommended you start from the template in the menu
6924 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
6926 \begin_inset space ~
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6937 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
6938 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
6939 Astronomy & Astrophysics
6942 If you are not using the template,
6943 note the following settings:
6946 \begin_layout Itemize
6948 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6958 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
6963 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6965 \begin_inset space ~
6971 that one was obvious).
6974 \begin_layout Itemize
6976 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
6980 \begin_inset space ~
6992 \begin_inset space ~
7003 The whole layout is done by the macros,
7004 you shouldn't change anything.
7007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7009 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7016 First thing to enter is the header information.
7017 It consists of five entries,
7018 of which one is optional.
7022 \begin_layout Itemize
7024 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7033 \begin_layout Itemize
7035 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7044 \begin_layout Itemize
7046 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7055 \begin_layout Itemize
7057 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7066 \begin_layout Itemize
7068 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7082 \begin_layout Standard
7084 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7085 Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised to keep the above sequence,
7086 just to get the best optics and meets the layout of the real document.
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7091 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7092 If you want to place footnotes in the header block,
7094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7098 \begin_inset space \space{}
7101 to state your present address,
7102 just use the standard footnote via the menu
7107 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7116 will automagically use the term
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7127 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7128 In addition to these topics,
7129 the macros use three additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
7130 commands that have no counterpart in \SpecialChar LyX
7134 \begin_layout Itemize
7136 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7143 to separate different names for more than one author and institute,
7147 \begin_layout Itemize
7149 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7156 to mark corresponding author/institute pairs.
7157 The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
7162 so you have to put a marker to each author.
7165 \begin_layout Itemize
7167 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7174 to supply an email address for fast contact.
7177 \begin_layout Standard
7179 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642374
7181 the appropriate command has to be entered as \SpecialChar TeX
7182 code in \SpecialChar LyX
7184 See the examples in the template and in
7186 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7187 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
7188 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
7189 Astronomy & Astrophysics
7196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7198 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7204 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7205 The abstract should immediately follow the header block and must contain five tokens:
7215 \begin_layout Enumerate
7217 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7222 (optional) {} leave it empty if necessary
7225 \begin_layout Enumerate
7227 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7235 \begin_layout Enumerate
7237 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7245 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7257 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7262 (optional) {} leave it empty if necessary
7265 \begin_layout Standard
7267 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7269 This structure not shown in
7276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7278 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7279 Supported environments
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7284 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7285 The A&A paper layout supports the following environments for structuring your text:
7288 \begin_layout Itemize
7290 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7296 \begin_layout Itemize
7298 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7304 \begin_layout Itemize
7306 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7312 \begin_layout Itemize
7314 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7320 \begin_layout Itemize
7322 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7328 \begin_layout Itemize
7330 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7336 \begin_layout Itemize
7338 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7344 \begin_layout Itemize
7346 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7352 \begin_layout Itemize
7354 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7360 \begin_layout Itemize
7362 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7368 \begin_layout Itemize
7370 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7376 \begin_layout Itemize
7378 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7387 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7388 Commands not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
7392 \begin_layout Standard
7394 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7395 Some commands are not yet supported by the
7399 layout for \SpecialChar LyX
7401 Some have already been mentioned.
7402 For the sake of completeness,
7403 they are listed all together here:
7406 \begin_layout Itemize
7408 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7416 \begin_layout Itemize
7418 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7426 \begin_layout Itemize
7428 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7436 \begin_layout Itemize
7438 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7446 \begin_layout Itemize
7448 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7456 \begin_layout Standard
7458 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7459 If you want to use any of these commands,
7460 you have to enter them yourself.
7463 Do not forget to use
7469 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7472 \begin_inset space ~
7481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7483 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7484 Figure and Table Floats
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7489 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7491 provides support for the necessary float environments
7502 therefore we won't tell much about it here.
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7512 Just remember that tables should be left-aligned.
7514 select the table and change the alignment in
7519 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7531 \begin_layout Standard
7533 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7534 There is only one special thing:
7535 the figures with a caption beside the figure.
7536 To create such a figure,
7537 you have to do the following:
7540 \begin_layout Enumerate
7542 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7543 Create a wide figure float:
7549 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7554 t\SpecialChar menuseparator
7559 from within the float,
7565 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7571 \begin_inset space ~
7582 \begin_inset space ~
7594 \begin_layout Enumerate
7596 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7597 Enter your caption text.
7600 \begin_layout Enumerate
7602 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7607 to move the cursor above the caption.
7610 \begin_layout Enumerate
7612 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7616 \begin_layout Enumerate
7618 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7619 Position the cursor after the figure and insert a horizontal fill by using the menu:
7625 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7630 rmatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7636 \begin_inset space ~
7645 dialog and select the
7659 \begin_layout Enumerate
7661 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7662 Switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_layout Enumerate
7677 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7686 Do not close the brace!
7689 \begin_layout Enumerate
7691 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7692 Position the cursor behind the caption text,
7693 switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7694 mode and insert the closing brace:
7698 \begin_inset space ~
7710 \begin_layout Standard
7712 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642458
7714 refer to the figures in the file in
7716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7717 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
7718 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
7719 Astronomy & Astrophysics
7724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7726 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7732 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7734 the paper has to be formatted in a special double-spacing layout.
7736 you have to add the option
7747 \begin_inset space ~
7757 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
7762 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
7764 \begin_inset space ~
7773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7775 \change_inserted 564990737 1670794716
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7781 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642520
7784 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7785 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
7786 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
7787 Astronomy & Astrophysics
7789 was written with \SpecialChar LyX
7791 It is the example paper from the original macro package,
7797 \begin_inset CommandInset href
7800 target "http://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/aa-package.zip"
7806 but translated to \SpecialChar LyX
7807 using the older unstructured abstract type.
7808 Use it for inspiration,
7809 and compare the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7814 with the \SpecialChar LyX
7818 \begin_layout Subsection
7823 \begin_layout Standard
7829 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7835 is a set of macros produced by the American Astronomical Society to facilitate electronic manuscript submission to the three journals they publish:
7836 the Astrophysical Journal (including the Letters and Supplement),
7837 the Astronomical Journal,
7838 and the Publications of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific.
7840 has proven to be an excellent tool for generating these documents,
7841 especially given its equation,
7843 and figure handling capabilities.
7845 requires version 5.0 (or higher) of these macros;
7847 which is the version described here,
7849 Versions prior to 5.0 are intended for use with \SpecialChar LaTeX
7850 2.09 and are fundamentally incompatible with \SpecialChar LyX
7852 The AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7853 package may be downloaded from the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7857 \begin_layout Standard
7858 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
7864 \begin_layout Standard
7866 \begin_inset Flex URL
7869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7871 https://aas.org/aastex/aastex-downloads
7879 \begin_layout Standard
7880 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7887 A complete user guide is contained in that package and you should familiarize yourself with it thoroughly before embarking on writing a paper in \SpecialChar LyX
7890 will not reduce the need to figure out all the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7892 it will only reduce the drudgery of typing everything in.
7893 It is your responsibility to ensure that the final exported \SpecialChar LaTeX
7894 document conforms completely to the requirements of the journal to which you are submitting your paper.
7897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7898 Starting a New Paper
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 I strongly suggest that you start with the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7906 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7912 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617265
7913 \SpecialChar menuseparator
7914 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
7915 American Astronomical Society
7916 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617310
7920 enter the new file name,
7928 This will show the most common fields found in a manuscript.
7929 Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
7934 ) with the correct information.
7935 Many of the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7936 commands and environments can be implemented directly in \SpecialChar LyX
7939 For commands such as these,
7940 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7941 code must be entered directly and marked as such.
7942 Such commands are referred to as \SpecialChar TeX
7945 I tried to minimize the amount of \SpecialChar TeX
7946 code needed in an AAS\SpecialChar TeX
7950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7951 Finishing Your Paper
7954 \begin_layout Standard
7955 When the paper is finished to your satisfaction and previews/prints correctly,
7957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7964 actions which need to be done before you submit it to the journals.
7968 \begin_layout Enumerate
7969 Export your paper as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7972 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
7973 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
7981 \begin_layout Enumerate
7986 file with your favorite text editor
7990 \begin_layout Enumerate
7991 remove the comment lines before the
8000 \begin_layout Enumerate
8005 usepackage...{fontenc}
8007 line if it appears (usually just after
8023 \begin_layout Enumerate
8024 remove everything between (and including) the
8037 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8038 preamble (which should appear immediately after the
8039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8042 User specified \SpecialChar LaTeX
8044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8055 \begin_layout Enumerate
8056 Run the resulting file through \SpecialChar LaTeX
8057 to make sure it still processes correctly.
8060 \begin_layout Enumerate
8061 Reread the journal requirements to make sure your filenames and formats are correct.
8064 \begin_layout Enumerate
8068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8069 Comments On Specific Commands
8072 \begin_layout Standard
8073 I will not describe the detailed usage of the individual AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8075 the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8080 ) gives a good description of each.
8081 Thus it's probably easiest for me to go down the list as found in the guide and offer comments where necessary.
8082 So let's begin \SpecialChar ldots
8086 \begin_layout Paragraph
8087 Things that work as expected
8090 \begin_layout Standard
8091 Because they work as you might expect,
8092 I simply list them and the section they are found in:
8209 begin{thebibliography}
8219 all the cite commands and their variations (2.13.2),
8220 the generic graphicx figure commands (2.14.1),
8249 amongst other places),
8280 \begin_layout Standard
8281 The following style options also work correctly:
8307 Simply put them in the
8313 Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
8319 \begin_layout Paragraph
8321 but require more comment
8324 \begin_layout Standard
8325 The following items work,
8326 but require a little more discussion:
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 These items are reserved for use by the journal editors,
8331 but you can put them into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8332 preamble if you feel compelled to do so:
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 These items may be placed in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8373 and are included as blanks in the template file:
8397 \begin_layout Itemize
8404 (2.3) – can only be used
8405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8413 not in the middle of a paragraph.
8414 Use \SpecialChar TeX
8415 code if you need to embed it.
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 (2.3) – will have extra {} after it.
8426 This should not cause an error.
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 (2.6) – can only be used
8437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8445 not in the middle of a paragraph.
8446 Use \SpecialChar TeX
8447 code if you need to embed it.
8450 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 (2.8) – can't insert a cross-reference tag,
8458 you must type the tag name by hand
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8482 (2.9) – will have extra {} after it.
8483 This should not cause an error.
8486 \begin_layout Itemize
8493 (2.11) – will have extra {} after it.
8494 This should not cause an error.
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 (2.14.2) – you can insert an optional filename argument by placing the cursor at the beginning of the text and selecting
8506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8518 inserts an optional argument of the type needed by
8525 Hopefully it will be renamed someday.
8528 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 for the catalog ID optional parameter
8544 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 for the catalog ID optional parameter
8560 \begin_layout Paragraph
8561 Things not implemented,
8562 use \SpecialChar TeX
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8578 setcounter{equation}
8581 Journal name abbreviations (2.13.4),
8624 insert it as the first element in the lefthand cell after where you want it.
8625 Don't use any of \SpecialChar LyX
8626 's rules in the table),
8701 \begin_layout Paragraph
8702 Things that cannot be implemented
8705 \begin_layout Standard
8707 at least in any meaningful sort of way,
8708 so I suggest ignoring them.
8709 They are the references environment (2.13.3),
8710 and the deluxetable environment (2.15).
8712 really need to use deluxetable,
8713 I suggest editing it in a separate file with a text editor,
8716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8718 \begin_inset space ~
8723 to include it in your \SpecialChar LyX
8726 \change_deleted 564990737 1671642564
8732 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642618
8735 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
8736 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
8737 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
8738 American Astronomical Society
8743 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642621
8749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8753 and Other Ruminations
8756 \begin_layout Paragraph
8757 Getting \SpecialChar LyX
8758 and AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8762 \begin_layout Standard
8763 It can be a bit tricky to get \SpecialChar LyX
8764 to recognize a new layout and document class.
8765 When all else fails,
8769 \begin_layout Enumerate
8770 Make certain that \SpecialChar LaTeX
8771 can find AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8773 Copy sample.tex (and perhaps table.tex) from the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8774 distribution into a directory completely unrelated to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8775 or AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8776 and run \SpecialChar LaTeX
8784 \begin_layout Enumerate
8789 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
8797 \begin_layout Enumerate
8800 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
8805 then restart \SpecialChar LyX
8809 \begin_layout Enumerate
8810 Open a regular new file,
8811 not from a template.
8812 Does AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8813 appear in the class list in
8815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
8821 \begin_layout Standard
8822 If you get a warning from an existing AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8823 document about not being able to find the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8824 layout or a message about
8825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8828 You should not mix title layouts with normal ones
8829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8833 things haven't been installed correctly.
8836 \begin_layout Paragraph
8838 error processing a table
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8845 attempts to center the table caption/title.
8846 This seems to produce a bad interaction in AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8847 so you should click somewhere in the caption/title,
8850 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8852 \begin_inset space ~
8867 This took care of it for me.
8870 \begin_layout Paragraph
8874 \begin_layout Standard
8876 1) I have noticed some funny spacing in the reference entries in the text.
8877 When you enter the bibliography item data,
8882 space between the last author and the parenthesis setting off the year;
8886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8890 \begin_inset space \space{}
8905 2) Entering the references at all is not obvious.
8906 The easiest thing is to start typing your first reference at the end of the document,
8907 then mark it as type
8912 That will put a small gray box in front of what you just typed.
8913 Click on the box to fill in the rest of the information.
8915 go to the end of an existing reference and press return.
8916 That will create a new line with its own box,
8920 \begin_layout Paragraph
8924 \begin_layout Standard
8925 Even though AAS\SpecialChar TeX
8926 provides its own figure commands (
8934 I much prefer \SpecialChar LaTeX
8935 's standard figure commands (with the default graphicx).
8944 \begin_inset space ~
8947 commands as \SpecialChar TeX
8948 code into a Figure Float box if you desire,
8949 but I never have much luck getting the layout right.
8950 With the standard graphics,
8956 usepackage{graphicx}
8958 command into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8959 preamble and handle the figures in the standard \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
8961 interspersing the figures in the text.
8962 I believe ApJ accepts figures exactly this way now;
8963 AJ might still use the
8964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8967 stack everything at the end
8968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8974 \begin_layout Paragraph
8975 Things I could have done,
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8988 things I could have implemented,
8991 I saw no point in double-spacing the text in the \SpecialChar LyX
8993 even though it is double-spaced in the paper manuscript.
8995 I chose not to make separate layouts for the preprint and preprint2 styles.
8996 Since I assume you will spend most of your time in the plain manuscript mode anyway,
8997 I decided not to chew up more disk space with this.
9001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9006 Your mileage may vary.
9007 I've now had papers published by both ApJ and AJ that have had 98% of the effort done in \SpecialChar LyX
9009 the last 2% was the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9010 post-processing and a few cleanups.
9011 I have had no trouble with the submission process,
9012 and I'm sure the journals were never aware that there might be a difference.
9014 go forth and publish!
9017 \begin_layout Subsection
9019 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442131
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642768
9029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9038 document class together with the style
9042 to facilitate the description of chess games.
9045 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
9046 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
9047 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
9061 \begin_layout Subsection
9063 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042028
9067 \begin_layout Standard
9069 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617396
9073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9083 This provides the following additional environments:
9087 \begin_inset space ~
9096 \begin_inset space ~
9105 \begin_inset space ~
9125 A template is available in the menu
9130 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
9132 \begin_inset space ~
9140 \begin_inset space ~
9143 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
9144 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
9148 It has been customized with further environments and contains all the information you may need.
9150 the documentation is also available from
9151 \begin_inset CommandInset href
9154 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc.pdf"
9162 \begin_layout Subsection
9164 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9170 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042046
9174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9179 provides an alternative to the
9184 It provides similar functionality,
9185 but you might prefer this layout with sans serif sections,
9190 \begin_layout Subsection
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9213 \begin_inset space ~
9218 textclass works with the American Physical Sociey's Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9220 \begin_inset Formula $\beta$
9227 \begin_layout Standard
9234 which works with Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9237 v3.1 is basically obsolete,
9238 as it works with \SpecialChar LaTeX
9240 That means that it doesn't interact very well with \SpecialChar LyX
9242 which requires \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
9244 although it has been kludged to work.
9245 Since Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9246 4.0 has been designed to work much more cleanly with \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
9253 \begin_inset space ~
9258 textclass should also be pretty easy to use.
9261 \begin_layout Standard
9262 These documents are supposed to be used in
9266 to the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9268 so we don't describe any of the special Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9270 and assume you'll know what to put in the preamble if necessary.
9273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9277 \begin_layout Standard
9278 All you need to do is install Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9280 as described in the package's README file.
9281 The package can be found at The Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9283 \begin_inset Flex URL
9286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
9294 Install it somewhere that \SpecialChar LaTeX
9296 Test it by trying to \SpecialChar LaTeX
9297 a short Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9298 4 document in some random directory (i.
9299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9303 \begin_inset space \space{}
9306 not the directory where you installed the class file.) Then,
9307 if you reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
9309 it will find the class file and let you use the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 Probably the easiest way to get started is either to import a Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9323 \begin_inset space ~
9329 found in the templates directory.
9332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9336 \begin_layout Standard
9337 Optional arguments to
9345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9364 \begin_inset space ~
9372 \begin_inset space ~
9379 Remember that in Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9381 at least one optional argument is required!
9385 \begin_layout Standard
9386 Other preamble matter,
9394 \begin_inset space ~
9401 \begin_inset space ~
9410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The layouts basically correspond to the commands in Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9418 the Email layout corresponds to
9425 Note that (at least as of Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9435 layouts are exactly equivalent,
9436 so you shouldn't need to use both.
9440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9441 In case you're curious,
9442 both were included so that
9446 would be able to translate both
9466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9470 \begin_layout Standard
9471 There are a couple of important unique aspects of Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9472 4 which might cause bugs that will be even more confusing in \SpecialChar LyX
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9477 In Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9496 The \SpecialChar LyX
9497 equivalent is that there is a separate Thanks layout.
9502 write footnotes in the
9507 or weird things may happen.
9508 See the Rev\SpecialChar TeX
9509 4 documentation for more details.
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 \begin_inset space ~
9526 \begin_inset space ~
9536 layouts must be placed
9544 layout and the corresponding
9562 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9566 \begin_layout Subsection
9568 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
9572 \begin_layout Standard
9574 \change_inserted 564990737 1671042072
9579 classes were replaced in 2013 with a completely new
9584 This package provides a \SpecialChar LaTeX
9585 class and templates for books to be published at Springer Gabler Research,
9586 Springer Vieweg Research,
9587 Springer Spektrum Research,
9588 Springer VS Research,
9589 or Springer VS Forschung.
9590 The documentation is available in German from
9591 \begin_inset CommandInset href
9594 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/springer/sr-vorl/sr-vorl.pdf"
9602 \begin_layout Section
9604 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439560
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9610 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439581
9611 See also the document classes in the Collections (section
9612 \begin_inset space ~
9616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9618 reference "sec:Collections"
9626 \begin_layout Subsection
9630 \begin_layout Standard
9636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9640 \begin_layout Standard
9641 Memoir is a very powerful and constantly evolving class.
9642 It has been designed with regard to fictional and non-fictional literature.
9643 Its aim is to let the user have maximum control over the typesetting of his document.
9644 Memoir is based on the standard book class,
9645 but it can also emulate the article class (see below).
9648 \begin_layout Standard
9650 the developer of Memoir,
9651 is known as the author of lots of useful packages in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9653 Most of them have been merged with Memoir.
9655 it is much easier to layout the table of contents,
9657 chapter designs and such.
9661 does not support all of these goodies natively.
9662 Some of them might be added to forthcoming releases
9666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9667 You are invited to send suggestions to
9668 \begin_inset Flex URL
9671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9673 lyx-devel@lists.lyx.org
9684 lots will probably never be supported,
9685 due to the limitations of \SpecialChar LyX
9687 Of course you can still use all features with the help of some native \SpecialChar LaTeX
9688 commands (\SpecialChar TeX
9693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9708 \begin_inset space ~
9712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9714 reference "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
9726 we can only list those features that are natively supported by \SpecialChar LyX
9728 For detailed descriptions (and for the rest of features) we recommend you have a look at the detailed manual of the Memoir class
9732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9747 \begin_inset Flex URL
9750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 CTAN:/macros/latex/memoir/memman.pdf
9763 which is not only a user guide for the class,
9764 but also both a comprehensive description on good typesetting and a superb example for good typesetting itself.
9767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9768 Basic features and restrictions
9771 \begin_layout Standard
9772 Memoir supports basically all features of the standard book classes.
9779 \begin_layout Description
9781 \begin_inset space ~
9785 Memoir has a broader range of font sizes:
9794 \begin_layout Description
9796 \begin_inset space ~
9800 The fancy page style is not supported,
9801 due to a command clash between Memoir and the fancyhdr package (they both define a command with the same name,
9802 which confuses \SpecialChar LaTeX
9805 Memoir comes with a number of its own page styles (see
9807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
9808 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
9810 \begin_inset space ~
9816 If you want to use these for the chapter pages,
9817 you have to use the command
9823 in the main text or in preamble (e.
9824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9828 \begin_inset space \space{}
9835 chapterstyle{companion}
9840 \begin_layout Description
9842 Sectionings (chapter,
9844 subsection etc.) come with an optional argument in the standard classes.
9846 you can specify an alternative version of the title for the table of contents and the headers (for instance,
9847 if the title is too long).
9852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9854 \begin_inset space ~
9859 at the beginning of a chapter/section.
9860 Memoir features a second optional argument and thus separates the table of contents from the header.
9861 You can define three variants of a title with this:
9862 one for the main text,
9863 one for the table of contents,
9864 and one for the headers.
9866 makes these available in form of specific
9877 \begin_layout Description
9879 In the standard classes (and in many other classes),
9880 the table of contents,
9881 the list of figures and the list of table start a new page automatically.
9882 Memoir does not follow this route.
9883 You have to insert a page break yourself,
9884 if you want to have one.
9887 \begin_layout Description
9889 For some unknown reason,
9890 Memoir uses pagination on the title page (in the standard classes,
9892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9900 If you want an empty title page,
9905 aliaspagestyle{title}{empty}
9910 \begin_layout Description
9912 With the class option
9918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
9919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
9920 Class Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
9922 \begin_inset space ~
9928 you can emulate article style.
9930 counters (footnotes,
9932 tables etc.) will not be reset on new chapters,
9933 chapters don't start a new page (but are—
9935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9950 \begin_layout Description
9953 Memoir does not allow the use of the deprecated font commands,
9954 which have been used in the old \SpecialChar LaTeX
9956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9960 \begin_inset space \space{}
9977 It produces an error and stops \SpecialChar LaTeX
9978 whenever such a command appears.
9983 reallows the commands and spits out warnings instead (which does at least not stop \SpecialChar LaTeX
9985 Since a lot of packages and particularly Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9986 style files are still using those commands,
9987 we have decided to use this option by default.
9990 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9994 \begin_layout Standard
9995 We will only describe the features supported by \SpecialChar LyX
9996 (which is not much currently).
9997 Please consult the Memoir manual
10001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10016 \begin_inset Flex URL
10019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10021 CTAN:/macros/latex/memoir/memman.pdf
10034 \begin_layout Description
10036 You may wonder why an abstract is an extra feature.
10038 it is in book class.
10039 Usually books don't have abstracts.
10043 You can use it wherever and how often you like.
10046 \begin_layout Description
10048 You may know this older typesetting style:
10049 The contents of a chapter are summarized below the title and also in the table of contents (e.
10050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10054 \begin_inset space \space{}
10059 Our hero arrives in Troia;
10060 he loses some friends;
10064 Chapterprecis does exactly this.
10065 It is therefore only sensible below a chapter.
10068 \begin_layout Description
10070 An epigraph is a smart slogan or motto at the beginning of a chapter.
10071 The epigraph environment provides an elegant way of typesetting such a motto.
10072 The motto itself (text) and its (optional) author (source) are divided by a short line.
10073 The author (source) can be inserted via
10075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10082 \begin_layout Description
10084 Memoir has lots of possibilities to typeset poetry (up to very complex figurative poems).
10086 can only support a few of them.
10088 which is a centered title for poems,
10089 which will also be added to the table of contents (verse is the standard environment for poems.
10090 Memoir has some enhanced versions of verse,
10091 but you need to use \SpecialChar TeX
10093 because they have to be nested inside regular verse environments,
10094 which is not possible with \SpecialChar LyX
10098 \begin_layout Description
10101 but it adds no entry to the table of contents.
10104 \begin_layout Subsection
10106 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10110 \begin_layout Standard
10112 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10125 document class but adds two environments:
10128 \begin_layout Description
10130 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10131 Recipe a numbered section environment at the
10135 level which generates a bold centered heading above a double horizontal rule
10138 \begin_layout Description
10140 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10151 are what are being described and the environment ends with a horizontal rule.
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642866
10159 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10160 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10161 Books\SpecialChar menuseparator
10164 illustrates its use.
10167 \begin_layout Standard
10169 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10170 It is designed for typesetting one or two recipes per page,
10171 with dimensions of 5.5
10172 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
10176 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
10180 The hyperlinked table of contents (ToC) and page numbers make browsing recipes convenient,
10181 and the pages can be joined together or printed 2 per page to normal letterpaper easily.
10182 The size was chosen to work in half-page 3-ring binder cover sheets,
10183 because un-laminated paper just doesn't last in the kitchen.
10186 \begin_layout Standard
10188 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442175
10189 The half-letter pages can be printed two per page using your printer driver,
10190 or bound together using
10192 pdfjam --nup 2x1 --papersize '{11in,8.5in}'
10202 is the compiled version of your recipes.
10205 \begin_layout Section
10207 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442207
10211 \begin_layout Subsection
10213 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10217 \begin_layout Standard
10219 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642942
10223 \begin_inset space \space{}
10227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10237 an unofficial implementation of the ‘Europass CV’ recommended by the European Commission in 2013.
10240 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10241 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10242 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10245 offers guidance on its use.
10246 Its documentation is available from
10247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10250 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/europasscv/europasscv.pdf"
10258 \begin_layout Subsection
10260 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10264 \begin_layout Standard
10266 \change_inserted 564990737 1671642984
10270 \begin_inset space \space{}
10274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10284 an unofficial implementation of the “Europass CV” recommended by the European Commission in 2002.
10287 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10288 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10289 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10292 offers guidance on its use.
10293 Its documentation is available from
10294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10297 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/europecv/europecv.pdf"
10305 \begin_layout Subsection
10307 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10311 \begin_layout Standard
10313 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643003
10317 \begin_inset space \space{}
10321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10331 This allows the creation of customizable CVs.
10334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10335 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10336 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10339 offers guidance on its use.
10340 Its documentation is available from
10341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10344 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/moderncv/manual/moderncv_userguide.pdf"
10352 \begin_layout Subsection
10354 \change_inserted 564990737 1671442208
10358 \begin_layout Standard
10360 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643024
10364 \begin_inset space \space{}
10368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10378 originally developed for use with \SpecialChar LyX
10382 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
10383 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
10384 Curricula Vitae\SpecialChar menuseparator
10387 offers guidance on its use.
10388 Its documentation is available from
10389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10392 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/simplecv/simplecv.pdf"
10400 \begin_layout Section
10402 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652454
10406 \begin_layout Standard
10408 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652455
10412 \begin_inset space \space{}
10418 \begin_inset space ~
10422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10424 reference "subsec:The-new-letter"
10432 \begin_inset space \space{}
10435 (with extra font sizes)
10438 \begin_inset space ~
10442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10444 reference "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
10449 ) document classes .
10452 \begin_layout Subsection
10454 \change_inserted 564990737 1671041970
10458 \begin_layout Standard
10460 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617528
10469 document class for writing letters according to the
10471 Deutsches Institut für Normung
10474 The file in the menu
10479 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10489 \begin_inset space ~
10492 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10493 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10496 offers guidance on its use.
10497 The documentation is available from
10498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10501 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/dinbrief/liesmich"
10509 \begin_layout Subsection
10511 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10517 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
10521 \begin_inset space \space{}
10530 document class for writing letters according to French conventions.
10531 The file in the menu
10536 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10538 \begin_inset space ~
10546 \begin_inset space ~
10549 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10550 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10552 \begin_inset space \space{}
10557 offers guidance on its use.
10560 \begin_layout Subsection
10562 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10568 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652499
10572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10581 document class for writing letters in German.
10582 The file in the menu
10587 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10589 \begin_inset space ~
10597 \begin_inset space ~
10600 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10601 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10608 offers guidance on its use.
10609 The documentation is available from
10610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10613 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/g-brief/g-brief.pdf"
10621 \begin_layout Subsection
10623 \change_inserted 564990737 1671458835
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10629 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617591
10638 document class for English letters and to create mailing labels.
10639 The file in the menu
10644 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10646 \begin_inset space ~
10654 \begin_inset space ~
10657 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10659 Letter (Standard Class)
10661 offers guidance on its use.
10664 \begin_layout Subsection
10666 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652527
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10672 \change_inserted 564990737 1672652527
10676 \begin_inset space \space{}
10685 document class for writing letters,
10686 faxes and envelopes in French.
10687 The file in the menu
10692 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 \begin_inset space ~
10702 \begin_inset space ~
10705 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Letters\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 \begin_inset space \space{}
10713 offers guidance on its use.
10714 The documentation is available from
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10718 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/lettre/lettre.pdf"
10726 \begin_layout Section
10728 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439660
10732 \begin_layout Subsection
10734 \change_inserted 564990737 1671458922
10738 \begin_layout Standard
10740 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617655
10744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10753 document class for creating presentations.
10754 The file in the menu
10759 ile\SpecialChar menuseparator
10761 \begin_inset space ~
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10772 Template\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
10776 offers guidance on its use.
10777 The documentation is available from
10778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10781 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf"
10789 \begin_layout Subsection
10792 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743383
10813 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
10817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10819 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743383
10823 \begin_layout Standard
10825 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743396
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10832 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10839 document class to make slides for overhead projectors.
10840 There are two document classes that can do this:
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 document class (section
10850 \begin_inset space ~
10854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10856 reference "sec:slitex"
10866 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10870 As of 2023 the former has continued to be maintained whereas
10872 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10875 has not been maintained since 2008.
10876 This section documents the latter.
10877 If your machine doesn’t have the
10880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10883 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10886 document class installed,
10887 you’ll probably have to use the
10890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10896 If you want to install the
10901 it is available from
10902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
10905 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/foiltex"
10911 You should also read the
10913 Installing New Document Classes
10920 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743436
10926 \begin_layout Standard
10928 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10932 \begin_layout Standard
10934 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10935 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
10936 to make slides for overhead projectors.
10937 There are two document classes that can do this:
10938 the default slides class and the
10940 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
10944 This section documents the latter.
10947 \begin_layout Standard
10949 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10950 I'm going to say this again,
10952 so that there's no misunderstanding:
10955 \begin_layout Standard
10957 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10958 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
10964 \begin_layout Standard
10967 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10970 This section documents the class
10971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10987 \begin_layout Standard
10989 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10990 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
10996 \begin_layout Standard
10998 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
10999 If you're looking for the documentation for
11000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11019 reference "sec:slitex"
11025 If your machine doesn't have the
11034 you'll probably have to use the default
11039 which isn't quite as good as
11044 \begin_layout Standard
11046 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743383
11051 class is designed for use with version
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11060 class file which is now an integral part of \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
11066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11070 \begin_layout Standard
11072 to use this document class,
11084 \begin_inset space ~
11090 There are some settings in the
11093 \begin_inset space ~
11098 dialog that you should know about that are specific to this class:
11101 \begin_layout Itemize
11102 Don't change the options
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11119 They're ignored by the
11126 \begin_layout Itemize
11127 The default font size is 20
11128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11131 pt with the other options being 17
11132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 \begin_layout Itemize
11148 The default font is
11156 but all math equations are still typeset in the usual roman font.
11159 \begin_layout Itemize
11162 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11165 supports A4 and Letter paper sizes as well as a special size for working with 35
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 It doesn't support A5,
11172 legal or executive paper sizes.
11175 \begin_layout Itemize
11176 Don't bother changing the
11180 settings because they are ignored anyway.
11181 All floats appear where they are defined in the text.
11184 \begin_layout Itemize
11189 setting behaves a bit differently for this class.
11192 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11195 provides extensive footer and header capabilities including a user-defined logo.
11197 \begin_inset space ~
11201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11203 reference "sec:foilfoot"
11209 The title page is treated differently to all other pages in the document and is
11217 has the logo centered at the bottom of the page (if one is defined).
11218 The possible page style choices and what they do are as follows:
11222 \begin_layout Labeling
11223 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11230 The final output contains no page numbers,
11231 or other headers or footers (except footnotes of course).
11235 \begin_layout Labeling
11236 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11243 The final output contains page numbers centered at the bottom of the page.
11244 No other headings or footers (other than footnotes).
11247 \begin_layout Labeling
11248 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11253 Page numbers in lower right corner.
11254 Additional headers and footers are also shown.
11255 This is also the default.
11258 \begin_layout Labeling
11259 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
11264 Gives you access to the
11268 package although its use with
11270 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11273 is discouraged by the writer of the
11275 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11278 package because of some potential page layout clashes.
11282 \begin_layout Paragraph
11286 \begin_layout Standard
11287 The following options may be used in the extra class options in the
11289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11295 \begin_layout Labeling
11296 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11301 This sets up the page layout for 7.33
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 which is about the same aspect ratio as a 35
11311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 making it a bit easier to work with this medium.
11318 \begin_layout Labeling
11319 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11324 Places a rule across the page below the header on every page except the title page.
11327 \begin_layout Labeling
11328 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11333 Places a rule across the page above the footer on every page except the title page.
11336 \begin_layout Labeling
11337 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11342 This is automatically set each time you create a new
11349 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11352 to use the dvips driver to rotate those pages that are set as landscape foils.
11355 \begin_layout Labeling
11356 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11361 Simply changes the page dimensions to those of a landscape page but doesn't do any rotation.
11362 Thus if you use this option you need to use an external program to rotate each page or feed your paper through your printer as landscape.
11363 Note that this option effectively reverses the roles of the
11371 environments (don't worry these are described in the next section).
11374 \begin_layout Labeling
11375 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11380 Equation numbers on the left.
11383 \begin_layout Labeling
11384 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
11389 Flush-left equations.
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11393 Supported Environments
11396 \begin_layout Standard
11397 Most of the environments commonly supported in other classes are also supported by the
11402 There are several additional environments provided by
11404 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11407 as well as a couple added by \SpecialChar LyX
11409 The following environments are shared with other classes:
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
11416 \begin_layout Itemize
11422 \begin_layout Itemize
11428 \begin_layout Itemize
11434 \begin_layout Itemize
11440 \begin_layout Itemize
11446 \begin_layout Itemize
11453 \begin_layout Itemize
11459 \begin_layout Itemize
11465 \begin_layout Itemize
11471 \begin_layout Itemize
11477 \begin_layout Itemize
11483 \begin_layout Itemize
11489 \begin_layout Itemize
11495 \begin_layout Itemize
11501 \begin_layout Itemize
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 all the major environments apart from the sectioning environments.
11515 Since foils are essentially self-contained sections,
11516 with a title and body,
11519 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11522 provides specific commands for starting new foils and these are:
11525 \begin_layout Itemize
11531 \begin_layout Itemize
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 also provides slightly modified versions of these two environments called:
11542 \begin_layout Itemize
11548 \begin_layout Itemize
11551 ShortRotatefoilhead
11554 \begin_layout Standard
11555 and the differences will be explained in the next section.
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 Since foils are often used in presenting ideas or new theorems and such
11561 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11564 also provides a comprehensive box of goodies for presenting them:
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11568 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
11571 \begin_layout Itemize
11577 \begin_layout Itemize
11583 \begin_layout Itemize
11589 \begin_layout Itemize
11595 \begin_layout Itemize
11601 \begin_layout Itemize
11607 \begin_layout Itemize
11613 \begin_layout Itemize
11619 \begin_layout Itemize
11625 \begin_layout Itemize
11631 \begin_layout Itemize
11642 \begin_layout Standard
11643 The starred versions are unnumbered while the unstarred versions are numbered.
11644 There are also two list environments added by \SpecialChar LyX
11648 \begin_layout Itemize
11654 \begin_layout Itemize
11660 \begin_layout Standard
11663 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11666 provides some powerful header and footer capabilities that are best set in the preamble although they may be set at any point in a document.
11667 If you want to change these settings in your document the best place to do so is at the very top of a foil,
11669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11675 \begin_inset space \space{}
11680 straight after the foilhead.
11683 \begin_layout Standard
11685 the following command styles are provided [
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11693 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
11696 \begin_layout Itemize
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11706 \begin_layout Itemize
11712 \begin_layout Itemize
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_layout Itemize
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11732 \begin_layout Itemize
11736 \begin_inset space ~
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11744 \begin_inset space ~
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11757 There are also a few commands provided by
11759 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
11762 that aren't directly supported by \SpecialChar LyX
11763 but I'll tell you what they do and how to use them in section
11764 \begin_inset space ~
11768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11770 reference "sec:unsuppfoils"
11778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11779 Building a Set of Foils
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 This section will give a simple introduction to using the different environments to build a set of foils.
11784 If you want to see an example set of foils,
11786 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643085
11791 file you find in \SpecialChar LyX
11797 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643099
11800 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
11810 \begin_layout Paragraph
11811 Give It a Title Page
11814 \begin_layout Standard
11815 Unlike other classes that provide
11838 creates the title on a page of its own.
11839 If you leave out the
11843 environment \SpecialChar LaTeX
11844 will substitute the current date (every time you regenerate the output).
11847 \begin_layout Paragraph
11851 \begin_layout Standard
11852 As I mentioned earlier,
11853 there are four ways of starting a new foil.
11854 For portrait foils you should use
11863 The difference between these two environments is the amount of space between the title of the foil (the foilhead) and the body of the foil.
11866 \begin_layout Standard
11867 Landscape foils are generated using the
11873 ShortRotatefoilhead
11876 Again the only difference is the spacing between foilhead and body.
11877 Both of the short versions have 0.5
11878 \begin_inset space ~
11881 inches less separation between the foilhead and the body.
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11886 One problem with the support for landscape foils is the requirement that you have to use the
11890 driver to generate the PostScript output otherwise the foils won't be rotated.
11891 It is possible to get landscape foils even if you haven't got the
11895 driver provided you can feed your foils sideways through your printer ;-)
11898 \begin_layout Paragraph
11904 \begin_layout Standard
11905 You can't have two of the same type of these environments directly following each other.
11906 If you use a normal paragraph break,
11908 you will just be extending the previous environment as if you had merged the two environments together.
11910 you need to insert a so-called separator.
11911 Please refer to the section entitled
11922 \begin_layout Paragraph
11926 \begin_layout Standard
11927 You get all the commonly supported list styles found in other classes as well as two new ones.
11928 I'll only describe the new ones here.
11929 If you want to find out more about the other list environments check out the
11934 If you intend to use itemized lists you might also want to read about the
11937 \begin_inset space ~
11941 \begin_inset space ~
11946 dialog described above in section
11947 \begin_inset space ~
11951 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355684
11953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11955 reference "chap:bullets"
11961 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355684
11963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11965 reference "sec:bullet"
11975 \begin_layout Standard
11976 The two new list styles,
11986 are designed to make it easier for you to create lists of do's and don'ts or right and wrong by providing dedicated environments that use a tick or a cross as the label of the list.
11987 These lists are in fact dedicated variants of the
11992 They do however require that you have the
11996 packages installed.
11999 \begin_layout Paragraph
12003 \begin_layout Standard
12006 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12009 redefines the floating tables and figures so that they appear exactly where they are in the text rather than pushing them to the top of the page or to some user specified location.
12010 In fact if you change the float placement settings they are simply ignored.
12013 \begin_layout Paragraph
12014 Page Headers and Footers
12015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12017 name "sec:foilfoot"
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12037 are two commands used to control the left-footer text string.
12038 The first is meant to allow you to include a graphic logo on your foils and defaults to
12039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12044 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12052 While the second is meant to provide a classification for the audience,
12056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12062 \begin_inset space \space{}
12066 It is empty by default.
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 The remaining page corners can be filled by
12073 \begin_inset space ~
12078 (which defaults to page numbers),
12082 \begin_inset space ~
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12101 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12107 name "sec:unsuppfoils"
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 All the commands mentioned below need to be set in a
12125 within another environment.
12128 \begin_layout Paragraph
12132 \begin_layout Standard
12133 All lengths are adjusted using the
12156 should be replaced by the name given to the length you want to change and
12160 is the length value.
12161 All lengths should be specified in units of length such as inches (
12174 ) or relative to some document or font-based length such as
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 It's possible to change the spacing between a foilhead and the body of the foil by adjusting the length specified by
12198 \begin_inset space \space{}
12201 in closer to their bodies put the following in the preamble:
12208 foilheadskip}{-0.5in}
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12212 The spacings around floats can be adjusted by setting these lengths:
12215 \begin_layout Labeling
12216 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12223 Separation between the text and the top of the float
12226 \begin_layout Labeling
12227 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12234 Separation between the float and the caption
12237 \begin_layout Labeling
12238 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12245 Separation between the caption and the following text
12248 \begin_layout Labeling
12249 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12256 You can make the captions narrower than the surrounding text by adjusting this length.
12257 Best done relative to
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 There are also several title page related lengths that you may find useful if you have a long title or several authors:
12270 \begin_layout Labeling
12271 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12278 Separation from headers to
12283 \begin_layout Labeling
12284 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12302 \begin_layout Labeling
12303 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12317 \begin_layout Labeling
12318 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12334 \begin_layout Labeling
12335 \labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12352 The last length related command affects all the list environments.
12363 a list environment then all the vertical spacing between the list items is removed.
12364 Note that this is a command not a length so it doesn't require
12370 like the stuff mentioned above.
12373 \begin_layout Paragraph
12374 Headers and Footers
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12390 commands control whether the logo in the
12394 definition appear on a given page.
12401 in the preamble then none of the foils will have the logo on them.
12402 If you don't want the logo on a particular page place the
12408 directly after the foilhead of that page and the
12414 directly after the next foilhead.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 If you decide to use the
12422 page style setting in the
12425 \begin_inset space ~
12430 dialog you should probably add
12440 to your preamble so headers and footers on landscape pages are correctly placed when rotated.
12441 This is due to some clashes between the page layouts provided by the
12452 \begin_layout Subsection
12454 \change_inserted 564990737 1671459032
12458 \begin_layout Standard
12460 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643165
12464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12473 document class for creating presentations.
12476 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
12477 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
12478 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
12481 offers guidance on its use.
12482 The documentation is available from
12483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
12486 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot/doc/powerdot.pdf"
12494 \begin_layout Subsection
12496 \change_inserted 564990737 1671459032
12497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12499 name "subsec:Seminar"
12508 \begin_layout Standard
12510 \change_inserted 564990737 1671643194
12514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12523 document class for creating presentations.
12526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
12527 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
12528 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
12531 offers guidance on its use.
12532 The documentation is available from
12533 \begin_inset CommandInset href
12536 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/seminar/doc/seminar-doc.pdf"
12544 \begin_layout Subsection
12547 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
12551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12562 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
12568 updated by the \SpecialChar LyX
12572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12574 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12580 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743492
12581 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
12582 to make slides for overhead projectors.
12583 There are two document classes that can do this:
12587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12592 document class and the
12595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12598 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12602 This section documents the former.
12603 If you’re looking for the documentation for
12606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12609 (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12620 reference "sec:Foiltex"
12626 As of 2023 the former has continued to be maintained whereas
12628 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12631 has not been maintained since 2008.
12633 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12641 \begin_layout Standard
12643 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12647 \begin_layout Standard
12649 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12650 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
12651 to make slides for overhead projectors.
12652 There are two document classes that can do this:
12653 the default slides class and the
12655 Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12659 This section documents the former.
12662 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12665 I'm going to say this again,
12667 so that there's no misunderstanding:
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12672 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12673 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12679 \begin_layout Standard
12682 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12685 This section documents the class
12686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12702 \begin_layout Standard
12704 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12705 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12711 \begin_layout Standard
12713 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12714 If you're looking for the documentation for
12715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12720 slides (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12729 \begin_inset space ~
12733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12735 reference "sec:foiltex"
12746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12751 slides (Foil\SpecialChar TeX
12755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12758 ] is actually somewhat better than the default
12766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12768 or so I've been told repeatedly by its advocates.
12769 Having never used it,
12770 I have no idea if this claim is true or not.
12775 which this section documents.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12780 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743492
12781 This class is the \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
12782 improvement of the old
12784 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
12788 Every \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
12789 distribution includes this class [which I'll just refer to as
12790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12802 so you're bound to have it.
12803 As I noted earlier,
12804 there are other classes,
12810 which also produce slides for overhead projectors and do a better job at it.
12812 there are some things which
12816 can do which the others can't,
12817 such as generate overlays.
12818 Read on to learn more!
12823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12827 name "sec:slidesetup"
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12836 to use this document class,
12838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12849 from the class list in the
12851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12855 There are some other special things you should know about this class:
12858 \begin_layout Itemize
12859 Don't bother changing the options
12864 They're not supported by the
12872 \begin_layout Itemize
12876 \begin_inset space ~
12881 behaves a bit differently for this class.
12882 The possible choices and what they do are as follows:
12886 \begin_layout Description
12891 The final output contains page numbers in the lower right corner.
12894 \begin_layout Description
12904 but also prints out any time markers you've put in.
12905 This is the default.
12908 \begin_layout Description
12913 The final output contains no page numbers,
12915 or alignment markers.
12919 \begin_layout Itemize
12924 class has an extra option:
12932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12943 in the extra class options.
12947 \begin_layout Standard
12948 Using this options allows you to add time markers to
12954 \begin_inset space ~
12958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12960 reference "sec:slideNote"
12969 \begin_layout Standard
12970 You can also use the template file
12971 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617694
12973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12986 to automatically set up a document to use the
12991 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617699
12996 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
12998 \begin_inset space ~
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13006 \change_inserted 564990737 1671617723
13007 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13008 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
13013 to open your new document
13014 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617728
13018 The template file also contains some examples of the special paragraph environments used by this class.
13019 I'll describe those next.
13022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13023 Paragraph Environments
13026 \begin_layout Paragraph
13027 Supported Environments
13030 \begin_layout Standard
13031 The first thing you'll notice when you start up a new
13035 document is the font size and type:
13036 it's the equivalent of the size
13037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13051 \begin_inset space ~
13057 This is also what's used in the output.
13059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13066 to remind you that this is a slide.
13067 Your final slides will use a larger font;
13069 you'll have less space.
13071 the larger default screen font isn't WYSIWYG,
13075 \begin_layout Standard
13076 The next thing that becomes obvious is the changes to the paragraph environment pull-down box [at the far-left end of the toolbar].
13077 Most of the paragraph environments you're used to seeing are missing.
13078 There are also five new ones.
13083 class itself only supports certain paragraph environments:
13086 \begin_layout Itemize
13092 \begin_layout Itemize
13098 \begin_layout Itemize
13104 \begin_layout Itemize
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13116 \begin_layout Itemize
13122 \begin_layout Itemize
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 \begin_layout Itemize
13140 \begin_layout Itemize
13147 \begin_layout Standard
13148 All of the other standard environments,
13149 including the section-heading environments,
13157 \begin_layout Standard
13159 you'll notice the following new environments:
13162 \begin_layout Itemize
13168 \begin_layout Itemize
13174 \begin_layout Itemize
13180 \begin_layout Itemize
13186 \begin_layout Itemize
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13193 These five are kind of quirky,
13195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13202 in \SpecialChar LyX
13206 doesn't permit you to nest any other paragraph environment into an empty environment.
13208 that's fine and dandy,
13209 but it means that you wouldn't be able to start a slide with anything except plain text.
13211 I've performed a little
13212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13223 \begin_layout Paragraph
13224 Quirks of the New Environments
13225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13227 name "sec:slideQuirk"
13234 \begin_layout Standard
13235 All five of the new paragraph environments are somewhat quirky due to inherent limitiations in the current version of \SpecialChar LyX
13237 As I just mentioned,
13239 forbids environments that begin with another environment.
13240 To get around this,
13245 environment isn't a paragraph environment as described in the
13253 \begin_layout Standard
13254 You should consider
13269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13272 pseudo-environments.
13273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13276 They look like a section heading or a
13277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13288 but really begin a [and,
13290 end the previous] paragraph environment.
13301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13308 These two perform some action.
13311 \begin_layout Standard
13312 A common feature of all five environments,
13337 is a rather long-ish label.
13338 The text following this label —
13339 ordinarily the contents of the paragraph environment —
13340 is utterly irrelevant for
13365 completely ignores it.
13367 you can leave these five environments completely empty.
13371 \begin_layout Standard
13376 to put any text after the rather long-ish label,
13378 This could be a short description of the contents of the
13385 enter your descriptive comment and hit
13389 as you normally would.
13392 \begin_layout Standard
13395 you don't want to enter any descriptive text,
13396 you'll hit another \SpecialChar LyX
13402 and will not let you start a new paragraph environment until you put something in the old one.
13407 \begin_layout Itemize
13408 Start entering the text that will
13439 \begin_layout Itemize
13440 Now move to the beginning of that paragraph.
13444 \begin_layout Itemize
13454 \begin_layout Itemize
13457 empty paragraph to a
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 Some future version of \SpecialChar LyX
13488 resolve this quirkiness\SpecialChar ldots
13492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13493 Making a Presentation with
13507 \begin_layout Paragraph
13515 \begin_layout Standard
13516 If you're expecting this section to teach you how to actually make a presentation,
13517 you'll be sorely disappointed.
13519 I'll describe all of the ways the
13523 class can assist you in preparing the materials for a presentation.
13524 Filling in the contents,
13532 the \SpecialChar LyX
13536 \begin_layout Standard
13541 environment [in the manner described in section
13542 \begin_inset space ~
13546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13548 reference "sec:slideQuirk"
13553 ] tells \SpecialChar LyX
13554 to begin a new slide [duh].
13555 The label for this environment/
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13572 followed by the label,
13574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13582 Any text or paragraph environments that follow this one go on the new slide.
13586 \begin_layout Standard
13587 Slides are probably the only time you'll need to forcibly end pages in \SpecialChar LyX
13588 (this can be specified in the
13595 once you finish entering the contents of one slide.
13596 If you've entered more text than can physically fit on a slide,
13597 the extra overflows onto a new slide.
13598 I don't recommend doing this,
13600 since the overflow slide won't have any page number on it.
13602 it may interfere with any
13606 you've made to accompany the oversized
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13622 environments work the same way as the
13627 They both create an
13628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13635 followed by a label [
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13653 The color is a stunning magenta instead of blue,
13655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 will look different,
13663 in style and in length.
13664 The label fonts of all three also differ from one another.
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13673 if the contents of a
13681 exceed the physical size of a slide or sheet of paper,
13682 the extra will overflow onto a new sheet.
13684 you should avoid this.
13685 It defeats the whole purpose of
13696 \begin_layout Paragraph
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13711 is a slide that sits atop another slide.
13712 Perhaps you wish to discuss a figure on the main
13716 before displaying the text associated with it.
13717 One way to accomplish this is tape a flap of dark paper over the part of the
13721 you want to display later.
13724 if you wish to overlap one graph with another,
13726 You would then have to fumble while speaking to align the two separate,
13731 s to align the two graphs.
13736 environment in both cases makes life much easier.
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13744 receives the page number of its
13745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13819 \begin_inset space ~
13822 appended to the page number of the parent
13833 you want the contents of both the
13841 to each fit on a single physical slide!
13842 You should probably consider an
13847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13860 the \SpecialChar LyX
13865 class provides a visual cue for this:
13866 the label at the start of an
13870 is shorter than that at the start of a
13876 when you generate printable output,
13877 you'll find alignment markers in all four corners of both the
13881 page and its parent
13886 These will assist you in lining up the two physical slides.
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13890 The major problem in overlaying two slides is aligning the contents of the two transparencies.
13891 How much space should you leave for that graph on the second slide?
13893 what if you want a graph and a sentence on second slide,
13894 but there is text on the main transparency that goes in between them?
13895 You could try and insert vertical space of the right size.
13896 The better way is to use
13907 \begin_layout Standard
13908 As their names imply,
13917 are two command-like paragraph environments that make all subsequent text invisible and visible,
13920 \begin_inset space ~
13924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13926 reference "sec:slideQuirk"
13931 that you don't place anything
13935 these two environments,
13942 it inserts a centered,
13943 sky-blue label into the page reading
13944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13947 <Invisible Text Follows>
13948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13952 For paragraphs following this label,
13962 it doesn't matter which] where they would be contain instead blank space.
13966 \begin_layout Standard
13972 the corresponding centered label is
13973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13976 <Visible Text Follows>
13977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13981 Paragraphs following this label behave normally.
13982 Note that the beginning of a new
13996 automatically shuts off an
14001 It's therefore not necessary to use
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14014 it should be obvious how to create overlay transparencies using the proper combination of
14033 \begin_layout Enumerate
14039 including everything that will appear on it,
14040 whether on the main slide or on the
14047 \begin_layout Enumerate
14048 Before each figure or paragraph that will appear only on the
14063 environment after the
14070 \begin_layout Enumerate
14075 immediately following the
14082 \begin_layout Enumerate
14083 Copy the contents of this
14094 \begin_layout Enumerate
14111 \begin_layout Standard
14113 You've just made an
14120 \begin_layout Standard
14121 There's one problem with the way I've designed the \SpecialChar LyX
14127 you can't make text in the middle of a paragraph invisible,
14128 nor make text in the middle of an invisible paragraph visible again.
14129 To accomplish this feat,
14130 you'll need to use some inlined \SpecialChar LaTeX
14135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14136 The commands of interest are:
14140 \begin_layout Itemize
14145 invisible \SpecialChar ldots
14149 \begin_layout Itemize
14154 visible \SpecialChar ldots
14158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14160 and need to be marked as \SpecialChar TeX
14163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14170 you wish to change goes in between the brackets [and after the
14183 If you don't know how to mark text as \SpecialChar TeX
14185 see the appropriate section of the
14197 \begin_layout Paragraph
14207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14209 name "sec:slideNote"
14216 \begin_layout Standard
14226 is associated with a
14227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14241 the \SpecialChar LyX
14246 class provides visual cues.
14251 is shorter than that of a
14255 [yet longer than that of an
14260 like the label of an
14264 is shockingly magenta.
14270 has the page number of its
14271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14323 You can have multiple
14327 s associated with a single
14342 you'll probably want to break up long
14346 s so that they fit on a single sheet of paper.
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14355 it contains anything additional you might want to say about a
14360 It could also be used as a sheet of reminders for a particular
14365 In the case of the latter,
14366 you might want to make use of time markers.
14368 the \SpecialChar LyX
14374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14381 support for time markers,
14384 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
14389 you'll have to resort to using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14393 \begin_layout Standard
14394 To use time markers,
14395 you'll need to specify the extra class option
14396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14408 \begin_inset space ~
14412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14414 reference "sec:slidesetup"
14420 This option turns on timing marks,
14421 which will appear in the lower-left-hand corner of every
14426 To set what appears in the time marker,
14427 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14457 The arguments of both commands are time measured in seconds.
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 sets the time marker to a given time.
14474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14487 increments the time marker by the specified amount.
14488 Using time markers and
14493 you can remind yourself how much time to spend on a particular
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14501 There's one last feature to describe.
14503 you'd like to print out all of your
14511 s on transparencies while printing all of your
14529 with which it is associated.
14530 What's a person to do?
14533 \begin_layout Standard
14535 there are two \SpecialChar LaTeX
14536 commands that allow you to select what to print out.
14537 Both must be placed into the preamble of your document.
14539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14554 will cause the output to contain only the
14565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14580 prevents the output of anything but
14585 I'd advise placing both commands in the preamble and initially comment both out.
14586 You can then preview your entire presentation as you write.
14587 When you're done writing,
14588 you can then uncomment one of the two to select what you want to print.
14589 I like to uncomment
14590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14606 print to a file with
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14619 comment it back out,
14621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14649 I can then send either file to a printer,
14650 loading transparencies or plain paper as appropriate.
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14654 You can also provide other arguments to the
14655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14683 See a good \SpecialChar LaTeX
14687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14692 Class Template File
14695 \begin_layout Standard
14696 I have also provided a template file
14697 \change_deleted 564990737 1671617750
14700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14720 begin your new presentation with
14722 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14724 \begin_inset space ~
14728 \begin_inset space ~
14732 \change_inserted 564990737 1671616988
14733 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14734 Presentations\SpecialChar menuseparator
14740 Your new \SpecialChar LyX
14741 presentation file will contain an example
14762 additionally contain an example of the use of
14772 the preamble will contain:
14775 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14776 % Uncomment to print out only slides and overlays
14779 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14783 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14789 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14796 % Uncomment to print out only notes
14799 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14803 \begin_layout LyX-Code
14811 \begin_layout Standard
14813 I created this class to support the \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
14815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14820 Sli\SpecialChar TeX
14824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14828 one of the built-in \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
14830 Neither I nor the rest of the \SpecialChar LyX
14831 Team endorse or oppose the use of this built-in slide class.
14832 It's here if you want it or need it.
14833 There exist other \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
14834 classes for creating presentations,
14840 \begin_inset space ~
14844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14846 reference "sec:foiltex"
14852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14863 package [present on some \SpecialChar TeX
14865 The latter is not yet supported under \SpecialChar LyX
14870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14871 Perhaps you can take on the task\SpecialChar ldots
14877 I know nothing about these other classes.
14878 Try them out to see what sort of alternative they provide.
14881 \begin_layout Section
14883 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
14887 \begin_layout Subsection
14889 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
14893 \begin_layout Standard
14895 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439661
14904 document class for preparing reports.
14910 this provides parts,
14911 chapters and sections but does not provide the paragraph styles needed for a book;
14917 it provides the abstract paragraph style.
14919 it does not start a new chapter on the right hand page.
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14924 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743528
14929 document classes are described in the Collections (section
14930 \begin_inset space ~
14934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14936 reference "sec:Collections"
14944 \begin_layout Standard
14946 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
14950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14953 (Japanese in vertical writing)
14958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14965 \begin_inset space ~
14969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14971 reference "subsec:Japanese"
14979 \begin_layout Standard
14981 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
14985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14992 \begin_inset space ~
14996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14998 reference "subsec:KOMA-Script"
15006 \begin_layout Standard
15008 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743530
15012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15015 (with extra font sizes)
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15025 reference "subsec:Extra-font-sizes"
15033 \begin_layout Standard
15035 \change_inserted 564990737 1672743569
15039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15042 (Polish version by M.
15043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15050 \begin_inset space ~
15054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15056 reference "subsec:Polish-M.W.collection"
15067 \begin_layout Section
15069 \change_inserted 564990737 1670439674
15073 \begin_layout Subsection
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15087 \begin_layout Standard
15088 Broadway is for writing plays.
15089 The format is more decorative than Hollywood,
15090 and much less standardized.
15091 This format should be suitable for workshops.
15094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15098 \begin_layout Standard
15099 The same as in Hollywood.
15102 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15106 \begin_layout Standard
15111 names as labels then cross-reference the label to insert the name.
15112 The cross-reference dialog will show the current cast of characters.
15115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15116 Paper size and Margins
15119 \begin_layout Standard
15127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15131 \begin_layout Standard
15132 The following environments are available.
15133 You can use broadway.bind to get the bind keys shown at the right.
15136 \begin_layout Itemize
15140 \begin_inset Newline newline
15145 You should not have to use this,
15146 but it is here for anything that does not fit otherwise.
15149 \begin_layout Itemize
15153 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15157 \begin_inset Newline newline
15162 Used to describe stage setting and the action.
15163 First use of speaker names in all CAPs.
15166 \begin_layout Itemize
15170 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15174 \begin_inset Newline newline
15179 Automatically numbered.
15180 On screen it will be arabic,
15181 but will print as Roman.
15184 \begin_layout Itemize
15188 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15192 \begin_inset Newline newline
15202 It is just centered text.
15205 \begin_layout Itemize
15209 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15213 \begin_inset Newline newline
15218 Not automatically numbered.
15219 You supply the number.
15220 This is because I couldn't figure out how.
15223 \begin_layout Itemize
15227 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15231 \begin_inset Newline newline
15236 A special case of Narrative to describe the setting and action as the curtain rises.
15239 \begin_layout Itemize
15243 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15247 \begin_inset Newline newline
15252 The speaker's (actor's) title,
15253 centered in all CAPS.
15256 \begin_layout Itemize
15260 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15264 \begin_inset Newline newline
15269 Instructions to the speaker.
15270 The parentheses are automatically inserted.
15271 The ( will appear on screen,
15272 but both will be in the printed play.
15273 This environment is only used within
15280 \begin_layout Itemize
15284 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15288 \begin_inset Newline newline
15293 What the Speaker says.
15296 \begin_layout Itemize
15300 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15304 \begin_inset Newline newline
15309 The curtain comes down.
15312 \begin_layout Itemize
15316 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15322 \begin_layout Itemize
15326 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15332 \begin_layout Itemize
15336 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15342 \begin_layout Standard
15346 \begin_layout Subsection
15347 Hollywood (Hollywood spec scripts)
15350 \begin_layout Standard
15356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15360 \begin_layout Standard
15361 Getting the format of a Hollywood script right is a
15362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15369 It is designed to make the readers focus on content and to be easy and familiar for the actors to read.
15370 Each page of a script should be one minute of film.
15371 Nothing goes in a script that you cannot see or hear on screen.
15372 The courier 12 pt font should be used throughout.
15376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15380 \begin_layout Standard
15381 Speakers' lines should NEVER break in mid-sentence.
15382 If a speaker's lines continue over a page break,
15387 title followed by (Cont'd).
15390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15394 \begin_layout Standard
15399 names as labels then cross-reference the label to insert the name.
15400 The cross-reference dialog will show the current cast of characters.
15401 You can use this to insert the speaker name in narratives also.
15404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15405 Paper size and Margins
15408 \begin_layout Standard
15416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15420 \begin_layout Standard
15421 The following environments are available.
15422 You can use hollywood.bind to get the bind keys shown at the right.
15425 \begin_layout Itemize
15429 \begin_inset Newline newline
15434 Used where nothing else works.
15438 \begin_layout Itemize
15444 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15452 \begin_inset Newline newline
15455 Usually followed by something like
15456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15459 on Sally waking up.
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 \begin_layout Itemize
15470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15474 \begin_inset Newline newline
15479 Introduces a new INTERIOR camera set-up.
15480 Always followed by DAY or NIGHT,
15481 or something similar to define the lighting required.
15482 Everthing on this line in CAPS.
15485 \begin_layout Itemize
15489 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15493 \begin_inset Newline newline
15498 Introduces a new EXTERIOR camera set-up.
15499 Everthing on this line in CAPS.
15502 \begin_layout Itemize
15506 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15510 \begin_inset Newline newline
15515 The character speaking.
15518 \begin_layout Itemize
15522 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15526 \begin_inset Newline newline
15531 Instructions to the speaker.
15532 The () are automatically inserted.
15535 \begin_layout Itemize
15539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15543 \begin_inset Newline newline
15555 \begin_layout Itemize
15559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15563 \begin_inset Newline newline
15568 Camera movement instruction.
15570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15574 \begin_inset space \space{}
15580 \begin_layout Itemize
15584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15590 \begin_layout Itemize
15594 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15600 \begin_layout Itemize
15604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15610 \begin_layout Itemize
15614 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15624 \begin_layout Itemize
15629 \begin_layout Itemize
15634 \begin_layout Itemize
15636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15644 \begin_layout Itemize
15650 \begin_layout Itemize
15655 \begin_layout Itemize
15660 \begin_layout Chapter
15662 \change_inserted 564990737 1671185876
15666 \begin_layout Section
15668 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15669 Academic Field Specifics
15672 \begin_layout Subsection
15674 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15676 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
15679 \begin_layout Standard
15681 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15682 This module provides two insets to typeset numbers and phrases of chemical hazard and precautionary statements.
15683 For a description see
15685 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15686 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
15687 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
15688 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
15692 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
15693 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
15694 Hazard and Precautionary Statements
15699 \begin_layout Subsection
15701 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15705 Risk and Safety Statements
15708 \begin_layout Standard
15710 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15711 This module provides two insets,
15721 accessible via the menu
15726 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15733 and an environment to typeset numbers and phrases of chemical risk and safety statements.
15736 \begin_layout Subsection
15738 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15742 \begin_layout Standard
15744 \change_inserted 564990737 1671716212
15745 This module uses the
15749 package to add environments useful for linguistics (numbered examples,
15753 You can obtain information about this module in
15758 elp\SpecialChar menuseparator
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15767 Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
15776 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15777 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
15778 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
15784 \begin_layout Section
15786 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15790 \begin_layout Subsection
15792 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15796 \begin_layout Standard
15798 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15799 This module supports the Braille writing system.
15800 It requires the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15806 This and its documentation can be obtained from
15807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
15810 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/braille"
15816 You do not have to reconfigure your system after installing it.
15822 elp\SpecialChar menuseparator
15828 \begin_inset space ~
15831 Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
15840 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15841 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
15842 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
15848 \begin_layout Section
15850 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15851 Annotation & Revision
15854 \begin_layout Subsection
15856 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15860 \begin_layout Standard
15862 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15863 This module provides “FiXme” (marginal) annotations for document revision purposes.
15864 A list of annotations can be produced by using the “List of FIXMEs” paragraph style.
15865 The annotations are customizable via the LaTeX preamble.
15866 See the FiXme documentation which can be obtained from
15867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
15870 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fixme/fixme.pdf"
15879 \begin_layout Paragraph
15881 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15885 \begin_layout Standard
15887 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15889 the notes are only displayed in “draft” mode (if the option “draft” has been inserted in
15891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15892 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15893 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
15894 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
15898 To display them always,
15907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15916 \begin_layout Subsection
15918 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15922 \begin_layout Standard
15924 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15925 This module provides various kinds of annotations for PDF output.
15928 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
15929 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
15930 PDF comments and File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15931 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
15932 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
15938 \begin_layout Subsection
15940 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15946 \begin_layout Standard
15948 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15949 This module provides fields and buttons for PDF forms.
15951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
15953 name "hyperref documentation"
15954 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/hyperref-doc.pdf"
15962 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
15963 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
15964 PDF forms and File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15965 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
15966 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
15972 \begin_layout Subsection
15974 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15980 \begin_layout Standard
15982 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15983 This module defines an inset to typeset reading aids (ruby,
15984 furigana) to Chinese characters.
15985 It uses the “okumakro,” “luatexja-ruby” or “ruby” package (depending on the TeX engine) or a fallback definition.
15989 \begin_layout Subsection
15991 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
15997 \begin_layout Standard
15999 \change_inserted 564990737 1671788778
16000 This module provides custom insets to insert TODO items in your document.
16001 In order to generate a “List of TODOs,” the module provides a paragraph style.
16002 Inserting “final” in
16004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16005 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16006 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
16007 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
16010 ) suppresses the output of TODO notes.
16012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16014 name "todonotes documentation"
16015 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/todonotes/todonotes.pdf"
16023 \begin_layout Section
16025 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16029 \begin_layout Subsection
16031 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16032 APA Style with NatBib
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16037 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16038 This module adds support for using natbib together with apacite (the bibliography style need not be apacite —
16039 it could be apacite,
16041 or any bibliography that works with both the natbib and apacite packages.)
16044 \begin_layout Section
16046 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16050 \begin_layout Subsection
16052 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16053 Fancy Colored Boxes
16056 \begin_layout Standard
16058 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16059 This module adds ten custom insets that support colored boxes via the tcolorbox package.
16062 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16070 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16071 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
16075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16077 name "tcolorbox documentation"
16078 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tcolorbox/tcolorbox.pdf"
16087 \begin_layout Subsection
16089 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16093 \begin_layout Standard
16095 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16096 This provides the custom insets
16114 to scale and rotate its content.
16117 \begin_layout Standard
16119 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16124 is a simple way of reversing text without any other enhancement:
16127 \begin_layout Standard
16129 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16130 \begin_inset Flex Reflectbox
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16135 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16136 Great Western Railway
16146 \begin_layout Standard
16148 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16149 (You will need to use Ctrl-R to see any of these examples.)
16152 \begin_layout Standard
16154 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16159 allows you to specify the dimensions of the text or image;
16160 permissible units are em,
16182 it scales by the width factor:
16185 \begin_layout Standard
16187 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16188 \begin_inset Flex Resizebox
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16193 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16194 \begin_inset Argument 1
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16208 \begin_inset Argument 2
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16221 Great Western Railway
16231 \begin_layout Standard
16233 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16238 allows you to rotate text around the reference point of the box.
16239 If you wish to rotate the box around a different origin,
16240 place the cursor inside the box and select Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16270 or meaningful combinations of these and the counterclockwise rotation angle is expressed in degrees.
16274 \begin_layout Standard
16276 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16277 \begin_inset Flex Rotatebox
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16283 \begin_inset Argument 1
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 \change_inserted 274215730 1672888693
16290 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16299 \begin_inset Argument 2
16302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16312 Great Western Railway
16322 \begin_layout Standard
16324 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16325 You can combine boxes as in:
16328 \begin_layout Standard
16330 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16331 \begin_inset Flex Rotatebox
16334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16336 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16337 \begin_inset Argument 1
16340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 \change_inserted 274215730 1672888702
16344 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16353 \begin_inset Argument 2
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16358 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16367 \begin_inset Flex Resizebox
16370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16372 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16373 \begin_inset Argument 1
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16387 \begin_inset Argument 2
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16401 \begin_inset Flex Reflectbox
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16406 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16407 Great Western Railway
16431 \begin_layout Standard
16433 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16439 select Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16440 V-Factor to add a vertical factor.
16441 If the vertical factor is omitted,
16442 the horizontal is used.
16443 Adding different horizontal and vertical values creates distortion as in
16446 \begin_layout Standard
16448 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16451 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
16454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16456 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16457 \begin_inset Argument 1
16460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16462 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16471 \begin_inset Argument 2
16474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16476 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16486 Great Western Railway
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16498 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16499 A negative horizontal value reverses the text and a negative vertical value inverts it so that you get
16502 \begin_layout Standard
16504 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16505 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
16508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16510 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16511 \begin_inset Argument 1
16514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16516 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16525 \begin_inset Argument 2
16528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16530 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16538 Great Western Railway
16546 \begin_inset Flex Scalebox
16549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16551 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16552 \begin_inset Argument 1
16555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16557 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16566 \begin_inset Argument 2
16569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16571 \change_inserted 564990737 1671829045
16579 Great Western Railway
16589 \begin_layout Subsection
16591 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16597 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16598 This module defines Boxes with section header.
16599 It is mainly intended for the SciPoster Document class.
16603 \begin_layout Subsection
16605 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16606 Variable-width Minipages
16609 \begin_layout Standard
16611 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16634 package provides a variable-width minipage,
16635 whose resulting width is the width of its contents (if this does not exceed the specified maximum width).
16636 The inset has two optional arguments which can be added by placing the cursor inside the minipage and entering
16638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16651 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16667 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16668 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16669 Variable-width Minipages
16675 \begin_layout Section
16677 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16681 \begin_layout Subsection
16683 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16684 Fix Computer Modern Fonts
16687 \begin_layout Standard
16689 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16690 This module uses the
16694 package to improve the appearance of Computer Modern fonts and make them available with arbitrary sizes.
16696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16698 name "fix-cm documentation"
16699 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/base/fix-cm.pdf"
16708 \begin_layout Subsection
16710 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16712 Kernel Fixes (Obsolete)
16715 \begin_layout Standard
16717 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16718 This module loads the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16723 which contains some bug fixes for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16725 If you use this module your typeset document may look different when you process it,
16726 depending on the respective version of
16734 \begin_layout Paragraph
16736 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16742 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16743 recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 kernels (as of 2015/01/01) include the functionality of
16753 module is obsolete with newer \SpecialChar LaTeX
16758 \begin_layout Subsection
16760 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16761 Minimalistic Insets
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16766 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16767 This module redefines several insets (Index,
16769 URL) as being Minimalistic.
16772 \begin_layout Subsection
16774 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16775 Title and Preamble Hacks
16778 \begin_layout Standard
16780 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16781 This module provides two new paragraph styles:
16785 \begin_layout Enumerate
16787 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16792 which puts whatever is entered into it into the preamble.
16795 to include preamble code in the body of a LyX document.
16799 \begin_layout Enumerate
16801 \change_inserted 564990737 1671884699
16806 which that will put its contents into the body of the LaTeX document,
16814 This is useful for making branches and notes in title-related material.
16816 if you put these in a Standard layout,
16817 this signals to LyX to output
16824 which may then come too early.)
16827 \begin_layout Section
16829 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16833 \begin_layout Subsection
16835 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16839 \begin_layout Standard
16841 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16842 This module uses the
16846 package for algorithm floats rather than LyX’s home-brewed algorithm floats.
16847 Use the Algorithm paragraph style to enter and indent the algorithm.
16849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16851 name "algorithm2e documentation"
16852 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithm2e/doc/algorithm2e.pdf"
16860 \begin_layout Subsection
16862 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16863 Bilingual Captions AKA Multilingual Captions
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16868 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16869 This module provides the paragraph style
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16877 with which to typeset multilingual captions.
16878 Within this paragraph style
16880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16883 allows you to enter the desired language using one of the babel names.
16886 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16887 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
16888 Multilingual Captions
16892 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16893 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
16894 Multilingual Captions
16896 further information on its use.
16899 \begin_layout Subsection
16901 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16902 Number Figures by Section
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16907 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16908 This module resets the figure number at section start and prepends the section number to the figure number,
16909 as in “Figure 2.1.” (By default book and report document classes number by Chapter and article document classes have a single sequence.)
16912 \begin_layout Subsection
16914 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16915 Number Tables by Section
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16920 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16921 This module resets the table number at section start and prepends the section number to the table number,
16922 as in “Table 2.1.” (By default book and report document classes number by Chapter and article document classes have a single sequence.)
16925 \begin_layout Section
16927 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16931 \begin_layout Subsection
16933 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16937 \begin_layout Standard
16939 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16940 This module adds an endnote inset,
16941 in addition to footnotes.
16947 which has some limitations but works with older LaTeX distributions as well.
16950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16951 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
16954 to insert an endnote and
16956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16957 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
16960 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
16963 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
16964 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
16965 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
16966 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
16972 \begin_layout Subsection
16974 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16975 Endnotes (Extended)
16978 \begin_layout Standard
16980 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
16981 This module adds an endnote inset,
16982 in addition to footnotes.
16987 package which is more powerful and customizable than the
16992 but requires a fairly modern LaTeX distribution (with LaTeX3).
16995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16996 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
16999 to insert an endnote and
17001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17005 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17008 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17009 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17010 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17011 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17017 \begin_layout Subsection
17019 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17020 Footnotes as Endnotes (Basic)
17023 \begin_layout Standard
17025 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17026 This module sets all footnotes as endnotes.
17032 which has some limitations but works with older LaTeX distributions as well.
17035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17036 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17039 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17042 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17043 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17044 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17045 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17051 \begin_layout Subsection
17053 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17054 Footnotes as Endnotes (Extended)
17057 \begin_layout Standard
17059 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17060 This module sets all footnotes as endnotes.
17065 package which is more powerful and customizable than then
17070 but requires a fairly modern LaTeX distribution (with LaTeX3).
17073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17074 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
17077 to insert the endnotes list where you want the endnotes to appear.
17080 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17081 Embedded\SpecialChar menuseparator
17082 Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
17083 Notes\SpecialChar menuseparator
17089 \begin_layout Section
17091 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17096 \begin_layout Subsection
17098 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17104 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17105 This module provides support for the
17109 package to print chess games.
17112 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17113 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17114 Articles\SpecialChar menuseparator
17117 where you will find
17126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17128 name "chessboard documentation"
17129 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/chessboard/chessboard.pdf"
17137 \begin_layout Subsection
17139 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17140 Lilypond Music Notation
17143 \begin_layout Standard
17145 \change_inserted 564990737 1672081439
17146 This module provides an inset via
17151 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17152 Custom Inset\SpecialChar menuseparator
17155 in which to enter code for the LilyPond music editor.
17156 It will then be processed in the output.
17159 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
17160 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
17165 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17166 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
17167 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
17171 It cannot be used if the modules
17174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17182 \begin_layout Section
17184 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17188 \begin_layout Subsection
17190 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17194 name "subsec:Customizable-Lists"
17201 \begin_layout Standard
17203 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17204 This module uses the
17208 package to enable the customization of various list environments.
17211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17213 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17214 Custom Enumerate Lists
17217 \begin_layout Standard
17220 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17221 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
17226 nsert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17233 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
17234 There you add the command
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17239 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17247 \begin_layout Standard
17249 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17250 in \SpecialChar TeX
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17262 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17267 is the first level counter of the enumeration.
17268 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
17273 ” in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17297 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17304 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
17305 For capital Roman numerals replace
17317 in the command above.
17318 For Arabic numerals use
17326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17333 items with capital or small Latin letters use
17349 \begin_layout Standard
17352 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17358 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17364 You can only number 26
17365 \begin_inset space ~
17368 items with Latin letters,
17369 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
17377 \begin_layout Standard
17379 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17380 Here is a list with custom numbering:
17383 \begin_layout Enumerate
17385 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17386 \begin_inset Argument 1
17389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17391 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17397 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17418 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17425 \begin_layout Enumerate
17427 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17428 \begin_inset Argument 1
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17439 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17460 \begin_layout Enumerate
17462 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17464 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17471 \begin_layout Enumerate
17473 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17474 \begin_inset Argument 1
17477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17479 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17485 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17488 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889016
17492 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889016
17496 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17512 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17519 \begin_layout Enumerate
17521 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17522 \begin_inset Argument 1
17525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17557 \begin_layout Standard
17559 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17560 For this list these commands were used:
17563 \begin_layout Standard
17566 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17576 \begin_inset Newline newline
17584 \begin_inset Newline newline
17588 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889037
17592 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889037
17596 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17600 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 \begin_layout Standard
17612 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17619 makes the label emphasized and
17620 \change_deleted 274215730 1672889045
17626 \change_inserted 274215730 1672889046
17630 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17636 \begin_layout Standard
17638 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17639 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17644 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17650 When you change the label of a list level,
17651 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17661 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17667 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17687 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17688 Numbered Paragraphs in Reports
17691 \begin_layout Enumerate
17693 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138213
17694 Official reports often include numbered paragraphs;
17695 you can achieve this with a variation on the approach outlined in the footnote
17696 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17702 reference "fn:If-you-really"
17715 in each command with
17722 \begin_layout Enumerate
17724 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17725 These numbered paragraphs were generated by inserting the \SpecialChar TeX
17727 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17734 \begin_layout Standard
17736 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17752 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17753 before the start of the section;
17760 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17761 section counter to generate the first part of the number.
17765 \begin_layout Enumerate
17767 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17768 I have ignored the subsection heading in this example because,
17769 with paragraphs numbered in this way,
17770 subsections are less likely to be used.
17773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17775 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17776 Resumed Enumeration
17779 \begin_layout Standard
17781 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17803 \begin_layout Standard
17805 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17806 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
17809 \begin_layout Enumerate
17811 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17812 \begin_inset Argument 1
17815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17817 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17823 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17840 \begin_inset Note Note
17843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17845 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17846 goes back to default numbering
17854 \begin_layout Enumerate
17856 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17860 \begin_layout Standard
17862 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17866 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
17868 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17872 \begin_layout Standard
17874 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17875 To resume an enumeration,
17881 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
17882 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17889 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17890 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17895 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17901 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
17902 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17913 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17914 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
17915 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
17916 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
17921 \begin_layout Standard
17923 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17929 \begin_layout Standard
17931 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17936 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
17940 \begin_layout Enumerate
17942 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17946 \begin_layout Enumerate
17948 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17952 \begin_layout Standard
17954 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17955 Enumeration starting at a given value:
17958 \begin_layout Enumerate
17960 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17961 \begin_inset Argument 1
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17972 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17986 This enumeration starts at 4
17989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17991 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
17993 \begin_inset Index idx
17998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18000 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18014 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18015 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
18016 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
18019 \begin_layout Itemize
18021 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18025 \begin_layout Itemize
18027 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18028 with standard spacing
18031 \begin_layout Standard
18033 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18034 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
18035 Add there the command
18039 to get no additional list space like in this example:
18042 \begin_layout Itemize
18044 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18045 \begin_inset Argument 1
18048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18056 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18073 \begin_layout Itemize
18075 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18079 \begin_layout Itemize
18081 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18085 \begin_layout Standard
18087 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18088 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the
18093 \begin_inset Index idx
18098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18111 For more information see the
18112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18114 name "enumitem documentation"
18115 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
18123 \begin_layout Standard
18125 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18126 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
18127 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
18128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18131 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
18134 \begin_layout Enumerate
18136 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18137 \begin_inset Argument 1
18140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18142 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18148 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18168 \begin_layout Enumerate
18170 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18171 with negative indentation
18174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18176 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18177 Further Customization
18178 \begin_inset Index idx
18183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18199 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18200 You can also change the style of description lists.
18204 \begin_layout Standard
18206 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18214 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18215 changes the description label font,
18219 \begin_layout Standard
18221 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18230 \begin_layout Standard
18232 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18233 sets the list style.
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18238 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18239 An example where the command
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18244 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18253 \begin_layout Standard
18255 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18259 \begin_layout Description
18261 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18263 \begin_inset space ~
18268 \begin_inset Argument 1
18271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18273 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18279 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18298 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
18299 therefore ionizing them.
18302 \begin_layout Description
18304 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18306 \begin_inset space ~
18310 In computer science,
18311 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
18313 or handles to a resource such as an object,
18315 disk space or other resource.
18318 \begin_layout Standard
18320 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18321 There are many more commands and features provided by the
18326 \begin_inset Index idx
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18333 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18344 For more information see the
18345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18347 name "enumitem documentation"
18348 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
18356 \begin_layout Subsection
18358 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18364 \begin_layout Standard
18366 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138150
18367 This module uses the package
18371 to provide nine new list environments.
18372 Itemized and enumerated lists can be typeset within paragraphs,
18373 as paragraphs and in a compact version.
18374 Most environments have optional arguments to format the labels.
18376 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18377 list environments itemize and enumerate are extended to use a similar optional argument.
18378 For further details see
18380 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18381 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18382 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18383 Paragraph Lists (paralist)
18388 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
18389 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
18393 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18395 name "paralist documentation"
18396 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/paralist/paralist.pdf"
18404 \begin_layout Section
18406 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18407 Literate Programming
18410 \begin_layout Subsection
18412 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18416 \begin_layout Standard
18418 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18419 This module allows the use of Noweb as a literate programming tool.
18420 The files and the documentation for Noweb can be obtained from
18421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18424 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/noweb"
18430 Literate programming is described in section
18431 \begin_inset space ~
18435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18437 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
18442 and there are three example files:
18445 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18446 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18447 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18453 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18454 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18455 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18460 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18461 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18462 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18463 Noweb2\SpecialChar LyX
18469 \begin_layout Subsection
18471 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18475 \begin_layout Standard
18477 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18478 This module uses the
18488 \begin_inset Flex Code
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18501 package in R for dynamic report generation has to be installed for this module to work:
18503 \begin_inset Flex Code
18506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18508 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18509 install.packages(“knitr”)
18520 \begin_layout Paragraph
18522 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18526 \begin_layout Standard
18528 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18529 it depends on R >= 2.14.1.
18531 \begin_inset Flex URL
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18536 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18538 http://yihui.name/knitr
18549 \begin_layout Standard
18551 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18556 also has to be installed.
18557 It cannot be used if the modules
18560 \begin_inset space ~
18572 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
18573 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
18579 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18580 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18581 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18585 \begin_inset space ~
18589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18591 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
18596 for information about literate programming.
18599 \begin_layout Subsection
18601 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18605 \begin_layout Standard
18607 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161542
18608 This module allows the use of the statistical language S/R as a literate programming tool.
18619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18622 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/includernw"
18628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18631 target "https://www.ctan.org/pkg/fancyvrb"
18636 are available from CTAN.
18637 It cannot be used if the module
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18648 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
18649 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
18655 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18656 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
18657 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18667 reference "sec:Literate-Programming"
18672 for information about literate programming.
18675 \begin_layout Section
18677 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18681 \begin_layout Subsection
18683 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18687 \begin_layout Standard
18689 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18690 This modules defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
18691 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
18693 the theorems are numbered consecutively throughout the document.
18694 This can be changed by loading one of the
18696 AMS Theorems (Numbered by \SpecialChar ldots
18700 It cannot be used if the modules
18706 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
18711 \begin_layout Subsection
18713 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18714 AMS Theorems (Extended)
18717 \begin_layout Standard
18719 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18720 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
18724 package (which must be loaded).
18725 It includes Criterion,
18736 Case and Question in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
18739 \begin_layout Subsection
18741 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18742 AMS Theorems (Extended,
18743 Numbered by Type within Chapters)
18746 \begin_layout Standard
18748 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18749 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
18751 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
18753 package (which must be loaded).
18754 It includes Criterion,
18763 Assumption and Case in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
18766 AMS Theorems (Extended)
18769 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter,
18770 restarted with each new chapter (e.g.,
18777 axiom 2.1\SpecialChar ldots
18779 as opposed to criterion 1,
18785 \begin_layout Subsection
18787 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18788 AMS Theorems (Extended,
18792 \begin_layout Standard
18794 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18795 This module defines some additional theorem environments for use with the
18797 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
18799 package (which must be loaded).
18800 It includes Criterion,
18809 Assumption and Case in both numbered and unnumbered forms.
18812 AMS Theorems (Extended)
18815 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
18823 as opposed to criterion 1,
18831 \begin_layout Subsection
18833 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18834 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
18837 \begin_layout Standard
18839 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18840 This module defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
18841 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
18847 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
18856 as opposed to theorem 1,
18862 The numbering restarts for each chapter:
18866 It cannot be used if the modules
18878 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
18882 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
18887 \begin_layout Subsection
18889 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18890 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
18893 \begin_layout Standard
18895 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18896 This module defines theorem environments and the proof environment using the extended AMS machinery.
18897 Both numbered and unnumbered types are provided.
18903 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
18912 as opposed to theorem 1,
18918 The numbering’s scope is the whole document.
18919 For chapter- and section-wide numbering,
18920 use one of the ‘within Sections’/‘within Chapters’ modules,
18922 It cannot be used if the modules
18934 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
18938 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
18943 \begin_layout Subsection
18945 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18946 Number Equations by Section
18949 \begin_layout Standard
18951 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18952 This module resets the equation number at section start and prepends the section number to the equation number,
18956 \begin_layout Subsection
18958 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18962 \begin_layout Standard
18964 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18965 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
18967 the theorems are numbered consecutively throughout the document.
18968 This can be changed by loading one of the
18970 Standard Theorems (Numbered by \SpecialChar ldots
18974 It cannot be used if the modules
18980 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
18986 \begin_layout Subsection
18988 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18989 Standard Theorems (Nameable)
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18994 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
18995 This module facilitates the use of named theorems.
18996 The name of the theorem goes into the “Additional Theorem Text” argument.
19000 \begin_layout Subsection
19002 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19003 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
19006 \begin_layout Standard
19008 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19009 This module numbers theorems and the like by chapter (i.e.,
19010 the counter is reset at each chapter start).
19011 Use this module only with document classes that provide a chapter environment.
19021 It cannot be used if the module
19023 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
19028 \begin_layout Subsection
19030 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19031 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Section)
19034 \begin_layout Standard
19036 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19037 This module numbers theorems and the like by section (i.e.,
19038 the counter is reset at each section start).
19048 It cannot be used if the module
19050 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapter)
19055 \begin_layout Subsection
19057 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19058 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19061 \begin_layout Standard
19063 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19064 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19074 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19083 as opposed to theorem 1,
19089 The numbering is reset at each chapter start.
19092 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19096 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19099 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19111 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19116 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Sections)
19120 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Sections)
19125 \begin_layout Subsection
19127 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19128 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Sections)
19131 \begin_layout Standard
19133 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19134 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19144 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19153 as opposed to theorem 1,
19159 The numbering is reset at each section start.
19162 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19166 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19169 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19181 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19186 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Chapters)
19190 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type within Chapters)
19195 \begin_layout Subsection
19197 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19198 Standard Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19203 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19204 This module defines some theorem environments for use with non-AMS classes.
19214 the different theorem types provided here each have a separate counter (e.g.,
19223 as opposed to theorem 1,
19229 The numbering’s scope is the whole document.
19230 For chapter- and section-wide numbering,
19231 use one of the “within Chapters”/“within Sections” modules,
19233 It cannot be used if any of the modules
19245 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19249 AMS Theorems (Numbered by Type)
19254 \begin_layout Subsection
19256 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19257 Standard Theorems (Unnumbered)
19260 \begin_layout Standard
19262 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19263 This module defines only unnumbered theorem environments and the proof environment,
19264 using the extended AMS machinery.
19265 It cannot be used if either of the modules
19276 \begin_layout Subsection
19278 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19282 \begin_layout Standard
19284 \change_inserted 564990737 1672224959
19285 This module provides a straightforward way to segregate subequations in LyX.
19288 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
19289 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
19296 \begin_layout Section
19298 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19302 \begin_layout Subsection
19304 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19305 Custom Header/Footer Text
19308 \begin_layout Standard
19310 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19311 This module requires the
19314 \begin_inset space ~
19328 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
19333 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19335 \begin_inset space ~
19340 dialog to be set to
19345 It adds six environments to document classes which support the
19352 \begin_layout Itemize
19354 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19360 \begin_layout Itemize
19362 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19368 \begin_layout Itemize
19370 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19376 \begin_layout Itemize
19378 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19384 \begin_layout Itemize
19386 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19392 \begin_layout Itemize
19394 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19402 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19403 Fancy Headers and Footers
19406 \begin_layout Standard
19408 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19409 The default page layout is rather plain;
19411 \begin_inset Flex Code
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19425 all you get is a centered page number at the bottom of the page.
19426 This document uses KOMA-script’s book class;
19427 so it appears to be a bit fancier.
19431 \begin_inset space ~
19445 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
19450 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19462 you will find that the page header is divided into three fields,
19463 not surprisingly labeled
19464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19490 The footer is also divided into these three fields.
19491 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
19492 commands to set these fields in the simplest manner are
19521 Suppose you wish to put your name in the upper left hand corner of each page.
19522 Simply insert the following command in the preamble:
19526 \begin_layout Standard
19528 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19544 \begin_layout Standard
19546 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19547 You will now see your name in the upper left.
19548 If a field has a default entry that you would like to get rid of (often the page number appears in the central footer) simply include a command with a blank argument,
19550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19556 \begin_layout Standard
19558 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19566 \begin_layout Standard
19568 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19571 an easier way to make simple changes.
19577 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
19582 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19583 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
19584 Page Layout\SpecialChar menuseparator
19585 Custom Header/Footer Text
19588 you will find you have six new environments corresponding to the six fields described above.
19591 \begin_layout Standard
19593 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19594 Let's get really fancy:
19595 lets put the section number with the word
19596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19608 \begin_inset space \space{}
19611 Section 3) in the upper left,
19612 the page number (e.
19613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19617 \begin_inset space \space{}
19620 Page 4) in the upper right,
19621 your name in the lower left,
19622 and the date in the lower right.
19623 Use your newly enabled environments to add these entries:
19626 \begin_layout Standard
19628 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19629 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
19635 \begin_layout Standard
19637 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19641 \begin_inset space ~
19659 \begin_layout Standard
19661 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19667 \begin_layout Standard
19669 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19684 \begin_layout Standard
19686 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19696 \begin_layout Standard
19698 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19704 \begin_layout Standard
19706 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19721 \begin_layout Standard
19723 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19724 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
19730 \begin_layout Standard
19732 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19733 Make sure you enter the commands
19752 as \SpecialChar TeX
19770 access \SpecialChar LaTeX
19771 ’s section and page counters,
19772 and so print out the current section and page numbers.
19779 simply prints out today’s date.
19782 \begin_layout Standard
19784 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19785 The thicknesses of the horizontal rules drawn beneath the header and above the footer can also be modified.
19786 If you don't want one of the rules,
19787 set its thickness to 0.
19788 The header rule has a default thickness of 0.4pt,
19789 the footer rule is 0pt.
19790 For this you will need to use \SpecialChar TeX
19794 \begin_layout Standard
19796 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19803 headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
19808 \begin_layout Standard
19810 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19817 footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
19819 to set the thicknesses.
19822 \begin_layout Standard
19824 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19825 You can switch the header/footer settings on and off for individual pages using \SpecialChar TeX
19830 thispagestyle{empty}
19837 thispagestyle{plain}
19844 thispagestyle{fancy}
19847 Simply insert them in the text on the page you want changed and mark them as \SpecialChar TeX
19850 title pages are marked as plain by default,
19851 while following pages are marked fancy when using the global fancy setting.
19855 \begin_layout Standard
19857 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19858 If you want a header or footer to be on the outer side of a two sided document,
19859 you need to use something like:
19862 \begin_layout Standard
19864 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19867 \begin_inset Flex Strong
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19888 \begin_layout Standard
19890 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19893 \begin_inset Flex Strong
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19916 \begin_layout Standard
19918 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19919 The first command clears all existing footers avoiding any conflicts with your new command.
19922 \begin_layout Standard
19924 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19925 You can enter any of these commands,
19926 the simpler ones in any of your new environments,
19927 the more complex ones as \SpecialChar TeX
19929 at any point in your document and they will take effect on the next page.
19932 \begin_layout Standard
19934 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19935 As a final example,
19936 it is possible to include an image in the header or footer.
19937 Suppose you want to put a company logo in the upper left hand corner.
19938 You might try something like
19941 \begin_layout Standard
19943 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19952 includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
19955 \begin_layout Standard
19958 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19959 (you may need to preface this with
19963 usepackage{graphics}
19965 if you don't include graphics elsewhere in your document).
19968 \begin_layout Standard
19970 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19971 For more information on fancy headers,
19973 \begin_inset Flex Code
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
19987 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19990 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fancyhdr"
19999 \begin_layout Subsection
20001 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20002 Landscape Document Parts
20005 \begin_layout Standard
20007 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20008 This module outputs parts of the document in landscape mode using
20010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20011 Custom Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20017 Custom Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20018 Landscape (Floating)
20023 \begin_layout Subsection
20025 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20028 name "sec:Multiple-Columns"
20035 \begin_layout Standard
20037 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20038 This module uses the
20043 \begin_inset Index idx
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236008
20060 package and is independent of the option
20073 ocument\SpecialChar menuseparator
20078 ettings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20086 If you want to have two columns for the whole document,
20087 you are recommended to use the
20096 For all other cases use this module.
20097 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20098 Multiple Text Columns
20101 \begin_layout Standard
20103 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20104 This feature is independent of the option
20106 Two-column document
20108 in the document settings under
20113 If you want to have 2
20114 \begin_inset space ~
20117 columns for the whole document,
20118 it is recommended to use the
20120 Two-column document
20123 For all other cases use this feature.
20126 \begin_layout Standard
20128 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236008
20129 To use multiple text columns in your document,
20130 you have to load the module
20136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20137 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20140 ) and must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20142 \begin_inset Flex Code
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 \begin_layout Standard
20157 Footnotes within multiple columns will be placed at the bottom of the page and not under each column.
20158 Within the different columns you can use everything,
20159 with the limitation that for floats you need to
20160 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236179
20161 use the float option
20164 \change_inserted 564990737 1672236179
20173 \begin_inset space ~
20183 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
20189 \begin_inset space ~
20199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20204 If you want to have 2
20205 \begin_inset space ~
20208 columns in your text,
20209 insert a multicolumn inset via the menu
20211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20213 \begin_inset space ~
20216 Insets\SpecialChar menuseparator
20218 \begin_inset space ~
20223 where the columns should start.
20224 Write all text that should be printed in 2
20225 \begin_inset space ~
20228 columns into this inset.
20231 \begin_layout Standard
20232 Here is an example:
20235 \begin_layout Standard
20237 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 The Adventure of the Empty House
20248 \begin_inset Newline newline
20251 by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 It was in the spring of the year 1894 that all London was interested,
20258 and the fashionable world dismayed,
20259 by the murder of the Honourable Ronald Adair under most unusual and inexplicable circumstances.
20260 The public has already learned those particulars of the crime which came out in the police investigation,
20261 but a good deal was suppressed upon that occasion,
20262 since the case for the prosecution was so overwhelmingly strong that it was not necessary to bring forward all the facts.
20264 at the end of nearly ten years,
20265 am I allowed to supply those missing links which make up the whole of that remarkable chain.
20266 The crime was of interest in itself,
20267 but that interest was as nothing to me compared to the inconceivable sequel,
20268 which afforded me the greatest shock and surprise of any event in my adventurous life.
20270 after this long interval,
20271 I find myself thrilling as I think of it,
20272 and feeling once more that sudden flood of joy,
20274 and incredulity which utterly submerged my mind.
20275 Let me say to that public,
20276 which has shown some interest in those glimpses which I have occasionally given them of the thoughts and actions of a very remarkable man,
20277 that they are not to blame me if I have not shared my knowledge with them,
20278 for I should have considered it my first duty to do so,
20279 had I not been barred by a positive prohibition from his own lips,
20280 which was only withdrawn upon the third of last month.
20288 \begin_layout Standard
20289 To get 3 or more columns,
20290 set the cursor into the multicolumn inset and use the menu
20292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20294 \begin_inset space ~
20298 \begin_inset space ~
20304 The number of the desired columns is written into that inset (for 3
20305 \begin_inset space ~
20309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20317 \begin_inset Newline newline
20320 Here is an example with 3
20321 \begin_inset space ~
20327 \begin_layout Standard
20328 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 \begin_inset Argument 1
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 It can be imagined that my close intimacy with Sherlock Holmes had interested me deeply in crime,
20345 and that after his disappearance I never failed to read with care the various problems which came before the public.
20346 And I even attempted,
20348 for my own private satisfaction,
20349 to employ his methods in their solution,
20350 though with indifferent success.
20353 which appealed to me like this tragedy of Ronald Adair.
20354 As I read the evidence at the inquest,
20355 which led up to a verdict of willful murder against some person or persons unknown,
20356 I realized more clearly than I had ever done the loss which the community had sustained by the death of Sherlock Holmes.
20357 There were points about this strange business which would,
20359 have specially appealed to him,
20360 and the efforts of the police would have been supplemented,
20361 or more probably anticipated,
20362 by the trained observation and the alert mind of the first criminal agent in Europe.
20364 as I drove upon my round,
20365 I turned over the case in my mind and found no explanation which appeared to me to be adequate.
20366 At the risk of telling a twice-told tale,
20367 I will recapitulate the facts as they were known to the public at the conclusion of the inquest.
20375 \begin_layout Standard
20376 You can have up to 10
20377 \begin_inset space ~
20380 columns if you want to,
20381 but that might not be very pleasant for the readers of your document.
20384 \begin_layout Standard
20386 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236245
20387 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
20395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20396 Columns inside Columns
20399 \begin_layout Standard
20400 You can also have columns inside columns:
20403 \begin_layout Standard
20404 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 The Honourable Ronald Adair was the second son of the Earl of Maynooth,
20411 at that time governor of one of the Australian colonies.
20412 Adair's mother had returned from Australia to undergo the operation for cataract,
20415 and her daughter Hilda were living together at 427 Park Lane.
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 The youth moved in the best society
20426 \begin_inset space ~
20430 so far as was known,
20431 no enemies and no particular vices.
20432 He had been engaged to Miss Edith Woodley,
20434 but the engagement had been broken off by mutual consent some months before,
20435 and there was no sign that it had left any very profound feeling behind it.
20436 For the rest {sic} the man's life moved in a narrow and conventional circle,
20437 for his habits were quiet and his nature unemotional.
20438 Yet it was upon this easy-going young aristocrat that death came,
20439 in most strange and unexpected form,
20440 between the hours of ten and eleven-twenty on the night of March 30,
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 Ronald Adair was fond of cards
20453 \begin_inset space ~
20456 – playing continually,
20457 but never for such stakes as would hurt him.
20458 He was a member of the Baldwin,
20460 and the Bagatelle card clubs.
20462 after dinner on the day of his death,
20463 he had played a rubber of whist at the latter club.
20464 He had also played there in the afternoon.
20469 The evidence of those who had played with him
20470 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset space ~
20480 – showed that the game was whist,
20481 and that there was a fairly equal fall of the cards.
20482 Adair might have lost five pounds,
20484 His fortune was a considerable one,
20485 and such a loss could not in any way affect him.
20486 He had played nearly every day at one club or other,
20487 but he was a cautious player,
20488 and usually rose a winner.
20489 It came out in evidence that,
20490 in partnership with Colonel Moran,
20491 he had actually won as much as four hundred and twenty pounds in a sitting,
20493 from Godfrey Milner and Lord Balmoral.
20494 So much for his recent history as it came out at the inquest.
20502 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20506 \begin_layout Standard
20507 The examples in this section show some more special features of multiple columns.
20510 \begin_layout Standard
20511 For more features of multiple columns,
20513 \begin_inset CommandInset href
20515 name "documentation"
20516 target "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf"
20521 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20523 \begin_inset Flex Code
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 \begin_layout Paragraph
20539 \begin_layout Standard
20540 To add a preface text for multiple columns,
20541 set the cursor into the multicolumn inset and use the menu
20543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20547 Write your preface text into that inset.
20548 \begin_inset Newline newline
20551 This is an example with some preface text:
20554 \begin_layout Standard
20555 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
20561 \begin_layout Standard
20562 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 \begin_inset Argument 2
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 And the story continues and continues and continues and continues\SpecialChar ldots
20578 On the evening of the crime,
20579 he returned from the club exactly at ten.
20580 His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
20581 The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second floor,
20582 generally used as his sitting-room.
20583 She had lit a fire there,
20584 and as it smoked she had opened the window.
20585 No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty,
20586 the hour of the return of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
20587 Desiring to say good-night,
20588 she attempted to enter her son's room.
20589 The door was locked on the inside,
20590 and no answer could be got to their cries and knocking.
20592 and the door forced.
20593 The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
20594 His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet,
20595 but no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
20603 \begin_layout Standard
20604 You can also use a section heading as the preface if you use a section command as \SpecialChar TeX
20606 For example the command
20609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
20612 subsection{subsection title}
20615 \begin_layout Standard
20616 creates a subsection.
20617 In this example the preface is a subsubsection:
20620 \begin_layout Standard
20621 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 \begin_inset Argument 2
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 This is a subsubsection heading as a preface
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 A minute examination of the circumstances served only to make the case more complex.
20660 In the first place,
20661 no reason could be given why the young man should have fastened the door upon the inside.
20662 There was the possibility that the murderer had done this,
20663 and had afterwards escaped by the window.
20664 The drop was at least twenty feet,
20666 and a bed of crocuses in full bloom lay beneath.
20667 Neither the flowers nor the earth showed any sign of having been disturbed,
20668 nor were there any marks upon the narrow strip of grass which separated the house from the road.
20671 it was the young man himself who had fastened the door.
20672 But how did he come by his death?
20673 No one could have climbed up to the window without leaving traces.
20674 Suppose a man had fired through the window,
20675 he would indeed be a remarkable shot who could with a revolver inflict so deadly a wound.
20677 Park Lane is a frequented thoroughfare;
20678 there is a cab stand within a hundred yards of the house.
20679 No one had heard a shot.
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 If there is less vertical space than 6
20689 \begin_inset space ~
20692 text lines is left on the page at the beginning of the multiple columns,
20693 a page break will be inserted before the multiple columns.
20694 Depending on the number of lines of the preface text,
20695 you might want to change this space.
20696 This is done by setting the cursor into the mulitcolumn inset behind the preface (if there is any) and using the menu
20698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20700 \begin_inset space ~
20704 \begin_inset space ~
20708 \begin_inset space ~
20714 Insert into that inset the amount of space like e.
20715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20719 \begin_inset space \space{}
20723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20731 \begin_inset Newline newline
20734 In this example the space is set to 7
20735 \begin_inset space ~
20738 text lines by using
20739 \begin_inset Flex Code
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 \begin_inset Flex Code
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 needs to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
20766 \begin_layout Standard
20767 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 \begin_inset Argument 3
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 On the evening of the crime,
20796 he returned from the club exactly at ten.
20797 His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
20798 The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second floor,
20799 generally used as his sitting-room.
20800 She had lit a fire there,
20801 and as it smoked she had opened the window.
20802 No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty,
20803 the hour of the return of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
20804 Desiring to say good-night,
20805 she attempted to enter her son's room.
20806 The door was locked on the inside,
20807 and no answer could be got to their cries and knocking.
20809 and the door forced.
20810 The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
20811 His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet,
20812 but no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
20820 \begin_layout Paragraph
20824 \begin_layout Standard
20825 The amount of space before and after multiple columns can be changed by changing the length
20826 \begin_inset Flex Code
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 For example the command
20841 \begin_layout LyX-Code
20849 \begin_layout Standard
20850 in \SpecialChar TeX
20851 Code changes its value to 3
20852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20856 The change must be made before the multiple columns' start.
20857 The predefined value is 13
20858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20866 \begin_inset Flex Code
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20884 \begin_layout Standard
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 multicolsep}{2.5cm}
20902 \begin_layout Standard
20903 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 All day I turned these facts over in my mind,
20910 endeavouring to hit upon some theory which could reconcile them all,
20911 and to find that line of least resistance which my poor friend had declared to be the starting-point of every investigation.
20912 I confess that I made little progress.
20913 In the evening I strolled across the Park,
20914 and found myself about six o'clock at the Oxford Street end of Park Lane.
20915 A group of loafers upon the pavements,
20916 all staring up at a particular window,
20917 directed me to the house which I had come to see.
20919 thin man with coloured glasses,
20920 whom I strongly suspected of being a plain-clothes detective,
20921 was pointing out some theory of his own,
20922 while the others crowded round to listen to what he said.
20923 I got as near him as I could,
20924 but his observations seemed to me to be absurd,
20925 so I withdrew again in some disgust.
20926 As I did so I struck against an elderly,
20928 who had been behind me,
20929 and I knocked down several books which he was carrying.
20937 \begin_layout Standard
20938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 The values you set with
20948 \begin_inset Flex Code
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 will be used for all following multiple columns until you change them again.
20967 \begin_layout Standard
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 \begin_inset Note Note
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 go back to the default
20995 \begin_layout Standard
20997 \change_deleted 564990737 1672236355
20998 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
21006 \begin_layout Paragraph
21010 \begin_layout Standard
21011 A column break can be forced by inserting the command
21012 \begin_inset Flex Code
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 as \SpecialChar TeX
21024 Code to that position in the text where the column should be broken.
21025 Note that this leads in most cases to whitespace in the text.
21026 \begin_inset Newline newline
21029 Here is an example:
21032 \begin_layout Standard
21033 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21042 You're surprised to see me,
21044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 I acknowledged that I was.
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21067 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
21068 as I came hobbling after you,
21069 I thought to myself,
21070 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
21071 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
21072 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
21073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21085 You make too much of a trifle,
21086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21094 May I ask how you knew who I was?
21095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21098 AFTER THIS SENTENCE THE COLUMN BREAK IS FORCED.
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21122 if it isn't too great a liberty,
21123 I am a neighbour of yours,
21124 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
21125 and very happy to see you,
21127 Maybe you collect yourself,
21132 \begin_inset space ~
21148 \begin_inset space ~
21153 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
21157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21168 \begin_layout Paragraph
21172 \begin_layout Standard
21173 The width of the columns is automatically calculated,
21174 but you can modify the space between the columns.
21175 This is done by changing the length
21176 \begin_inset Flex Code
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 Its predefined value is 10
21189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21193 Here is an example where
21194 \begin_inset Flex Code
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21212 \begin_layout Standard
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 \begin_layout Standard
21231 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 My observations of No.
21238 \begin_inset space \space{}
21241 427 Park Lane did little to clear up the problem in which I was interested.
21242 The house was separated from the street by a low wall and railing,
21243 the whole not more than five feet high.
21244 It was perfectly easy,
21246 for anyone to get into the garden,
21247 but the window was entirely inaccessible,
21248 since there was no water pipe or anything which could help the most active man to climb it.
21249 More puzzled than ever,
21250 I retraced my steps to Kensington.
21251 I had not been in my study five minutes when the maid entered to say that a person desired to see me.
21252 To my astonishment it was none other than my strange old book collector,
21254 wizened face peering out from a frame of white hair,
21255 and his precious volumes,
21256 a dozen of them at least,
21257 wedged under his right arm.
21265 \begin_layout Standard
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 \begin_inset Note Note
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 go back to the default
21293 \begin_layout Paragraph
21297 \begin_layout Standard
21298 Between the columns a rule with a width of the length
21299 \begin_inset Flex Code
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21311 If this rule width is set to 0
21312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21315 pt (this is the default),
21316 the rule is suppressed.
21317 In the following example the rule is 2
21318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21324 \begin_layout Standard
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 columnseprule}{2pt}
21342 \begin_layout Standard
21343 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21352 You're surprised to see me,
21354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 I acknowledged that I was.
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21377 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
21378 as I came hobbling after you,
21379 I thought to myself,
21380 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
21381 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
21382 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
21383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21395 You make too much of a trifle,
21396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21404 May I ask how you knew who I was?
21405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21419 if it isn't too great a liberty,
21420 I am a neighbour of yours,
21421 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
21422 and very happy to see you,
21424 Maybe you collect yourself,
21429 \begin_inset space ~
21445 \begin_inset space ~
21450 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21465 \begin_layout Standard
21466 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21472 \begin_layout Standard
21473 The rule can be colored by redefining the command
21474 \begin_inset Flex Code
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 This is done by inserting the command
21489 \begin_layout LyX-Code
21494 columnseprulecolor}{
21499 \begin_layout Standard
21500 as \SpecialChar TeX
21501 Code before the multicolumn inset.
21503 \begin_inset Flex Code
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 in this command by a color of your choice.
21513 You can use all pre- and self-defined colors.
21522 \begin_inset space ~
21527 for more information about pre- and self-defined colors.
21528 To go back to the default color insert the command
21531 \begin_layout LyX-Code
21536 columnseprulecolor}{
21541 \begin_layout Standard
21542 Here is the example with a cyan rule and 1
21543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21546 cm column separation:
21549 \begin_layout Standard
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 columnseprulecolor}{
21578 \begin_layout Standard
21579 \begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
21582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21588 You're surprised to see me,
21590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 I acknowledged that I was.
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21613 and when I chanced to see you go into this house,
21614 as I came hobbling after you,
21615 I thought to myself,
21616 I'll just step in and see that kind gentleman,
21617 and tell him that if I was a bit gruff in my manner there was not any harm meant,
21618 and that I am much obliged to him for picking up my books.
21619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21631 You make too much of a trifle,
21632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21640 May I ask how you knew who I was?
21641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21655 if it isn't too great a liberty,
21656 I am a neighbour of yours,
21657 for you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street,
21658 and very happy to see you,
21660 Maybe you collect yourself,
21665 \begin_inset space ~
21681 \begin_inset space ~
21686 With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
21690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21701 \begin_layout Standard
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 columnseprule}{0pt}
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 columnseprulecolor}{
21728 \begin_inset Note Note
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 go back to the default
21740 \begin_layout Section
21742 \change_inserted 564990737 1671270380
21746 \begin_layout Subsection
21748 \change_inserted 564990737 1671270398
21750 \change_deleted 564990737 1671270396
21756 \begin_layout Standard
21759 as well as any other text processor uses by default rectangular paragraphs.
21760 For special cases like for example posters,
21761 invitation cards or poems you can modify the paragraph shape to one of your choice.
21763 \change_deleted 564990737 1672311802
21764 This can be done by using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21766 \begin_inset Flex Code
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 which is loaded by using in the document settings the module
21777 Custom paragraph shapes
21780 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311802
21781 This module uses the
21785 package to provide over a dozen paragraph shapes as well as commands to define custom shapes.
21791 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21795 \begin_layout Standard
21800 provides the following shapes:
21803 \begin_layout Standard
21804 \begin_inset Tabular
21805 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="13" columns="3">
21806 <features booktabs="true" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21807 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="16col%">
21808 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="40col%">
21809 <column alignment="left" valignment="middle" width="35col%">
21810 <row endhead="true">
21811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <row interlinespace="default">
21849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 Circle with circular hole (in the size of a CD/DVD)
21871 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 take care there is not too much text
21884 <row interlinespace="default">
21885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 calculation might fail
21920 <row interlinespace="default">
21921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 Rhomboid (symbolizing a
21939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <row interlinespace="default">
21964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 <row interlinespace="default">
21999 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 <row interlinespace="default">
22034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 Nut for bolt (hexagon with circular hole)
22056 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22068 <row interlinespace="default">
22069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 <row interlinespace="default">
22104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <row interlinespace="default">
22139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <row interlinespace="default">
22174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22191 Normal/reversed rain drop
22196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 calculation might fail
22209 <row interlinespace="default">
22210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 The \SpecialChar TeX
22234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 <row interlinespace="default">
22247 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 \begin_inset Newline newline
22262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 Triangles in different orientations
22273 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 \begin_layout Standard
22293 To use a shape for your paragraph,
22294 simply select it in \SpecialChar LyX
22295 's pull-down box for environments in the toolbar.
22298 \begin_layout Standard
22299 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
22305 \begin_layout Standard
22306 Here is an example paragraph in the shape of a nut:
22309 \begin_layout Standard
22310 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22319 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22320 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22321 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22323 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22324 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22325 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22326 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22327 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22328 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22332 \begin_layout Standard
22333 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22339 \begin_layout Standard
22340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 paragraphs cannot run over a page break.
22361 \begin_layout Standard
22362 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22368 \begin_layout Standard
22370 \begin_inset Flex Code
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 takes care that the shape will always be preserved,
22380 no matter how much text is in the paragraph.
22381 Therefore the paragraph size changes with the amount of contained text.
22382 This can lead to paragraph sizes exceeding the page margins.
22383 To demonstrate the size scaling,
22384 here is the same example paragraph but with twice as much text:
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
22397 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22398 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22399 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22401 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22402 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22403 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22404 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22405 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22406 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22408 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22409 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22410 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22412 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22413 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22414 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22415 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22416 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22417 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22421 \begin_layout Standard
22422 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22428 \begin_layout Standard
22429 An exception is the shape
22434 It cannot be scaled because it must fit the size of a CD/DVD.
22435 Therefore the amount of text that fits into the shape is limited.
22436 \begin_inset Newline newline
22448 meaning that the calculation of their size can fail,
22449 depending on the amount of text.
22450 You will then get the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22455 Arithmetic overflow
22456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22460 In this case one can try to remove or add some text;
22461 if nothing works one has to use another shape.
22464 \begin_layout Standard
22465 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22471 \begin_layout Standard
22472 For shapes with tips you will maybe see that \SpecialChar LaTeX
22473 's hyphenation routine fails for text in the tips.
22474 Therefore it is often necessary to add hyphenation points
22479 arg "specialchar-insert hyphenation"
22484 ) to the corresponding text parts.
22487 \begin_layout Standard
22488 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22494 \begin_layout Standard
22495 Shapepar paragraphs are either always centered or placed on the page so that their left border touches the left page margin.
22496 You can therefore not use the paragraph dialog to align such paragraphs.
22497 A solution is to put the paragraph into a minipage or parbox and align the box.
22498 The problem is hereby to find the right width for the box.
22499 Because if it is too wide and you center the box,
22500 the paragraph is not centered too because it sticks at the left side of the box.
22501 So you might have to play a bit with the width until it fits.
22502 Here are two heart-shaped paragraphs,
22503 the first one is not aligned,
22504 the second one is right-aligned:
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
22514 \begin_layout Heart
22518 Lo\SpecialChar softhyphen
22519 rem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22520 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22521 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22523 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22524 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22525 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22528 \begin_layout Standard
22529 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22535 \begin_layout Standard
22538 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22548 height_special "totalheight"
22553 backgroundcolor "none"
22556 \begin_layout Heart
22560 Lo\SpecialChar softhyphen
22561 rem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22562 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22563 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22565 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22566 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22567 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22579 \begin_layout Standard
22580 You can define any shape you want.
22581 Doing this manually is a lot of work because every coordinate must be specified.
22582 But there is a way to let the computer calculate the coordinates:
22585 \begin_layout Enumerate
22586 Install the program
22587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22590 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/jpgfdraw"
22598 \begin_layout Enumerate
22605 TeX/LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
22606 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22609 and select the font size you are using in your document.
22610 For example this document uses the size 12
22611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22617 \begin_layout Enumerate
22621 \begin_layout Enumerate
22624 TeX/LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
22627 to export the shape to coordinates.
22628 In the appearing dialog use either the outline of your shape for the coordinates or the path itself.
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 For more information see
22634 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22636 target "http://www.dickimaw-books.com/apps/jpgfdraw/manual/shapepar.html"
22649 \begin_layout Standard
22650 The coordinates are written into a \SpecialChar TeX
22652 To use it for your \SpecialChar LyX
22656 \begin_layout Enumerate
22657 Place the cursor before the first character of your paragraph (or into a new empty one).
22660 \begin_layout Enumerate
22661 Open in \SpecialChar LyX
22664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22665 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22667 \begin_inset space ~
22673 select the file and use
22682 \begin_layout Standard
22683 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
22689 \begin_layout Standard
22690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 The changed shape only applies to the current paragraph;
22700 everything is reset to normal for the next paragraph.
22701 Therefore the shape definition file must be input into every paragraph with the desired shape.
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22710 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22717 Here is an example:
22720 \begin_layout Standard
22721 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22727 \begin_layout Standard
22728 \begin_inset CommandInset include
22730 filename "SpecialParagraphShape.tex"
22737 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22738 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22739 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22741 At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
22742 Stet clita kasd gubergren,
22743 no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet.
22744 Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
22745 consetetur sadipscing elitr,
22746 sed diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat,
22750 \begin_layout Standard
22751 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22757 \begin_layout Standard
22763 to draw complexer shapes in
22767 you can draw the shape in a program of your choice and import the resulting image to
22772 Then you only need to draw a line or spline along the outline of the image.
22775 \begin_layout Standard
22776 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22782 \begin_layout Standard
22785 Custom paragraph shapes
22787 also provides the two commands
22795 which can be used to define custom shapes coordinate by coordinate.
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 These commands are internally used for all shapes described here.
22805 For information how these styles are used and about further customization possibilities,
22807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22809 name "documentation"
22810 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/shapepar/shapepar.pdf"
22816 \begin_inset Flex Code
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 \begin_layout Subsection
22830 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22834 \begin_layout Hanging
22836 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22837 This module adds the
22843 one where all but the first line of the paragraph is indented.
22844 This may not appear in your \SpecialChar LyX
22845 document but will appear in the final output.
22848 \begin_layout Subsection
22850 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22853 name "subsec:Initials"
22857 Initials (Drop Caps)
22860 \begin_layout Initial
22862 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22863 \begin_inset Argument 2
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22877 \begin_inset Argument 3
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22890 module adds a drop capitals paragraph style
22894 for paragraph environments which you can use wherever you want to have drop capitals.
22895 You then have three more items in the
22902 \begin_layout Itemize
22904 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22909 which creates an inset for the drop capital
22912 \begin_layout Itemize
22914 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22919 which creates an inset for the rest of the word
22922 \begin_layout Itemize
22924 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22929 which allow you configure the formatting of the drop capital.
22932 \begin_layout Standard
22934 \change_inserted 564990737 1672311925
22935 To customize the appearance of the style,
22938 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
22939 Embedded Objects\SpecialChar menuseparator
22940 Objects Surrounded by Text\SpecialChar menuseparator
22946 \begin_layout Section
22948 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
22952 \begin_layout Subsection
22954 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
22955 Hyphenatable Text Markup
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22960 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
22961 This package defines text styles to highlight,
22964 underline and capitalize/small-cap text by means of the
22969 As opposed to the markup provided by the Text Properties dialog,
22970 words marked-up with
22976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22978 name "soul documentation"
22979 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/generic/soul/soul.pdf"
22987 \begin_layout Subsection
22989 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22995 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
22996 This module defines some character styles for logical markup:
23000 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23021 \begin_inset Flex Emph
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23040 \begin_inset Flex Strong
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23055 \begin_inset Flex Code
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 \change_inserted 564990737 1672312011
23068 which are accessed via the
23073 dit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23075 \begin_inset space ~
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23091 \begin_layout Chapter
23093 \change_deleted 564990737 1671304317
23097 \change_inserted 564990737 1671304322
23099 \change_deleted 564990737 1671304331
23100 ies with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23106 \begin_layout Standard
23107 The most basic information about how to use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23112 with \SpecialChar LyX
23113 is contained in the section
23115 Bibliography databases
23122 The following subsections explain special bibliography features supported by \SpecialChar LyX
23126 \begin_layout Section
23127 Alternative Citation Styles
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 Standard Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23137 \begin_inset space \space{}
23141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23148 ) to refer to a cited work.
23150 in many scientific disciplines,
23151 other citation styles are in use.
23152 The most common one is the author-year style (e.
23153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23157 \begin_inset space \space{}
23161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23170 supports three packages that provide this style,
23172 \begin_inset Flex Code
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 \begin_inset Flex Code
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 \begin_inset Flex Code
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 Each of these packages has their pros and cons,
23205 which cannot be listed in detail.
23206 If you only want to have simple author-year (or author-numerical) style,
23207 or if you want to use one of the countless style files for
23208 \begin_inset Flex Code
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23218 then the established
23219 \begin_inset Flex Code
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23228 package is probably your choice.
23229 If you look for specific citation styles common in law studies,
23230 you might consider the
23231 \begin_inset Flex Code
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 If you want to have full control over the formatting or look for advanced features such as ibidem,
23242 footnote citations,
23243 full title citations,
23244 advanced date formats (such as 400 BC) or full localization to other languages than English,
23245 you should definitely consider
23246 \begin_inset Flex Code
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 which exceeds all other packages in terms of features,
23257 but is also quite heavy and more resource-hungry.
23260 \begin_layout Standard
23261 The handling of these packages in \SpecialChar LyX
23262 is basically the same.
23264 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23275 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23321 Biblatex (Natbib mode)
23328 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 \begin_inset space ~
23351 6.5.3 in the User's Guide for more information on these choices).
23352 With all these packages,
23353 you will get some extra features in the citation dialog and you can select the style of the reference (
23354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23390 Note that either package needs specifically designed style files.
23391 They all ship their own,
23392 but there are lots of additional style files,
23393 and there is even an interactive style file builder
23397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 \begin_inset Flex URL
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/custom-bib/
23415 \begin_inset Flex Code
23418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 \begin_layout Section
23428 Subdivided Bibliographies
23431 \begin_layout Standard
23432 Sometimes you might need to divide your bibliography into several sections.
23433 If you are for instance a historian,
23434 the possibility to separate sources and scientific works is most likely a
23435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23444 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23445 itself does not allow you to do this.
23446 But with the help of some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23448 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23449 can be extended to fit your needs.
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23454 provides native support for one of these packages,
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 \begin_inset Flex URL
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/bibtopic/
23480 The advantage of this package (compared to other packages such as
23484 ) is that you don't need to define new citation commands.
23486 you need to prepare different bibliographic databases which include the entries for the different sections of the bibliography.
23488 If you want to divide your bibliography into the sections
23489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23505 you first need to create two bibliographic databases,
23507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23511 \begin_inset space \space{}
23515 \begin_inset Flex Code
23518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 \begin_inset Flex Code
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23538 \begin_layout Standard
23540 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23551 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 Subdivided bibliography
23571 Now you can insert multiple Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23573 one for each section of your bibliography.
23574 Returning to our example:
23575 Insert the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23577 \begin_inset Flex Code
23580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 and a second one for the database
23587 \begin_inset Flex Code
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 You are free to use the same or different styles for each section.
23599 you can choose if the bibliography section should contain
23600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23603 all cited references
23604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23607 of the specified database(s) (which is the default),
23609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23612 all uncited references
23613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23625 This might be useful if you would like to separate your bibliography into three sections:
23627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23653 The titles for the sections can be added as ordinary sections or subsections.
23655 \begin_inset Flex Code
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 removes the bibliography title,
23665 you have to manually re-add that,
23666 too (as a chapter* or section*,
23670 \begin_layout Standard
23676 the procedure is a bit different.
23687 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 Subdivided bibliography
23696 option is disabled if you use
23706 provides its own means to generate subdivided bibliographies.
23707 You can either add keywords to bibliography entries via the
23708 \begin_inset Flex Code
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 entry option and then filter bibliography sections by keyword (by adding
23718 \begin_inset Flex Code
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 field of the dialog that opens if you left-click on the
23738 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 Biblatex Generated Bibliography
23748 or you can filter by entry types (such as
23757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23762 \begin_inset Flex Code
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 \begin_inset Flex Code
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 or you can create so-called
23793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23796 Bibliography Categories
23797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23800 to which you can assign individual entries.
23801 Please refer to the Biblatex manual,
23804 Subdivided Bibliographies
23810 \begin_layout Section
23811 Multiple Bibliographies
23812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23814 name "subsec:Multiple-Bibliographies"
23821 \begin_layout Standard
23822 Multiple bibliographies,
23824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23828 \begin_inset space \space{}
23831 a bibliography for each part,
23834 subsection or child (sub-document) of the document,
23835 are also supported by \SpecialChar LyX
23837 In order to enable it,
23839 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23844 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23850 and select the relevant unit (e.
23851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23864 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 Multiple Bibliographies
23874 Then add a Bib(la)\SpecialChar TeX
23875 bibliography to each unit (e.
23876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23880 section) of your document.
23882 a separate bibliography,
23883 containing only the references done in the current unit is generated.
23886 \begin_layout Standard
23887 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
23890 \begin_inset Flex Code
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 \begin_inset Flex Code
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 package is used to create multiple bibliographies.
23910 The former package is used if you select
23911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23923 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 Sectioned Bibliography
23933 In all other cases,
23935 \begin_inset Flex Code
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 An alternative approach,
23950 if you are willing to use some
23951 \begin_inset Flex Noun
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 \begin_inset space ~
23966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23968 reference "sec:Inserting-TeX-Code"
23975 \begin_inset Flex Code
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 \begin_inset Flex Code
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 encloses the specified units in
24002 \begin_inset Flex Code
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24012 \begin_inset Flex Code
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 \begin_inset Flex Code
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 in order to create the units.
24036 Note that this approach has some limitations.
24038 every citation reference has to be inside some
24039 \begin_inset Flex Code
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 So citations outside a defined unit (e.
24050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24054 before the first section if you use
24055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24071 You can also create your own units by entering
24072 \begin_inset Flex Code
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 \begin_inset Flex Code
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 as \SpecialChar TeX
24096 code (for instance to work around the mentioned limitation).
24100 \begin_inset Flex Code
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 s cannot be nested.
24110 A second limitation is that
24111 \begin_inset Flex Code
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 always processes all references of a bibliography database,
24121 even if they are not cited.
24122 This can result in odd labels (e.
24123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24135 if two works of this author from 2014 are in the database,
24136 even if only one is cited).
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24146 \begin_inset Flex Code
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 option is used instead.
24156 If you need specific units,
24157 you can start them with the \SpecialChar TeX
24159 \begin_inset Flex Code
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 \begin_inset Flex Code
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 If you also want to control the end of the unit,
24185 use the environment
24186 \begin_inset Flex Code
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 \begin_inset Flex Code
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 \begin_inset Flex Code
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 s cannot be nested.
24224 In addition to the individual bibliography of the current unit,
24229 also provides an easy way to output all bibliographies,
24232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24236 at the end of the document).
24238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24241 all reference units
24242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24245 from the Content combo box of the Bib(la)TeX inset dialog in order to achieve this.
24246 Please refer to the
24250 manual for more information on this topic.
24253 \begin_layout Chapter
24255 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355654
24259 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355667
24261 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355661
24263 \change_inserted 564990737 1671355684
24265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24267 name "chap:bullets"
24272 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355684
24274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24285 \begin_layout Standard
24291 \begin_layout Section
24295 \begin_layout Standard
24297 provides 216 bullet shapes that can be accessed from a simple dialog.
24298 Using this dialog you can easily specify what bullet shape to use at each level of an itemized list.
24299 These settings are document-wide so you won't be able to specify different sets of bullets for different paragraphs.
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 actually you can but you'll have to do it by hand.
24313 \begin_layout Section
24317 \begin_layout Standard
24318 Open the dialog by selecting the
24319 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24329 menu item and then select the
24330 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 \begin_layout Standard
24343 The dialog provides you with a table of bullet shapes.
24344 A column of buttons on the left of the table provides access to the six different panels of bullet shapes.
24345 The row of buttons across the top is used to select which bullet depth you are changing.
24347 \change_deleted 244031559 1603875981
24348 A text entry under the table shows the currently selected bullet shape's \SpecialChar LaTeX
24349 equivalent and this can be edited if desired.
24350 If you do modify the text you will also need to specify any needed packages in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24356 \begin_layout Standard
24357 The six panels are divided up by the packages they require.
24358 The following table shows the mappings from button name to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24362 \begin_layout Standard
24364 \begin_inset Tabular
24365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
24366 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24438 base \SpecialChar LaTeX
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24642 \begin_layout Standard
24644 doesn't stop you using bullets from packages you don't have.
24645 If you get errors from \SpecialChar LaTeX
24646 when you try to view or print the file,
24647 then it is likely you are missing a package.
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 doesn't restrict your use since you may be editing locally and exporting elsewhere.
24661 \begin_layout Section
24665 \begin_layout Standard
24666 Select which bullet depth you want to change then select the bullet shape and size.
24667 Any changes will not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
24669 but are visible when viewing the document.
24672 \begin_layout Standard
24673 You can reset a bullet shape to the default simply by clicking your right mouse button on the appropriate bullet depth button.
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 \change_inserted 564990737 1672138075
24680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24682 name "fn:If-you-really"
24692 want to have multiple sets of paragraphs with different sets of bullets in each,
24693 then you're going to have to get your hands dirty with \SpecialChar TeX
24695 The bullet selection dialog can help though because it provides you with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24696 code for a wide range of bullet shapes.
24697 To make your own custom paragraphs you have the following options:
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 \begin_layout Itemize
24747 Use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24749 \begin_inset Flex Code
24752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 to specify a new bullet shape for a given depth.
24761 You'll also need to save the current bullet shape so you can restore it again afterwards.
24762 In this itemized list the following \SpecialChar LaTeX
24763 code was used to change the bullet used for the first depth.
24767 \begin_layout LyX-Code
24777 \begin_layout LyX-Code
24794 \begin_layout Itemize
24795 Note that the itemize depth is specified in Roman numerals as part of the
24804 \begin_layout Itemize
24805 \begin_inset Argument item:1
24808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 Specify each individual entry by starting each item with the bullet shape enclosed in a
24831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24838 inset (available at
24840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24844 \begin_inset Flex Noun
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 this item was started with
24857 \begin_inset Flex Code
24860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 You'll also need to revert the labelitem back to its previous setting for the global bullet shape settings to remain in effect.
24897 The way used here was:
24900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
24915 \begin_layout Chapter
24919 \begin_layout Section
24920 Multipart Documents
24923 \begin_layout Subsection
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 When you are working on a large file with many sections,
24929 it is often convenient to break up the document into several files,
24930 or perhaps you have something where a table may change from time to time,
24931 but the preceding text does not.
24933 you should seriously consider using multipart documents.
24935 scientific papers often have five major sections:
24941 Each of these could be its own separate \SpecialChar LyX
24944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24951 file which contains the title,
24956 plus the five included files.
24957 It is important to note that each of these files is a full \SpecialChar LyX
24958 file which can be formatted and printed on its own,
24959 as well as included in a master file.
24960 Each of these files must have the same document class,
24962 don't attempt to mix book classes with article classes.
24963 You may also include \SpecialChar LaTeX
24966 these files must not have their own preamble (i.
24967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24971 \begin_inset space \space{}
24974 everything up to and including the
24975 \begin_inset Flex Code
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 line as well as the
24987 \begin_inset Flex Code
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 line must be deleted) or else errors will be generated when you try to make a DVI file.
25001 \begin_layout Standard
25003 allows you to include files quite easily with
25004 \begin_inset Flex Noun
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25010 \begin_inset space ~
25019 When you click on this selection a small box is inserted into the file at the current cursor location.
25020 Clicking on the box raises a dialog which allows you to select the file to be included,
25021 and the method of its inclusion.
25025 \begin_layout Standard
25026 The file selection box should by now be obvious.
25027 The three inclusion methods are
25028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25070 are similar in many ways,
25071 but there are also some notable differences:
25074 \begin_layout Enumerate
25076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25083 are typeset beginning on a new page,
25084 while files that are
25085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25092 are typeset starting on the current page.
25095 \begin_layout Enumerate
25096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25103 files cannot themselves
25104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25130 infinite sub-inputting is possible.
25133 \begin_layout Enumerate
25134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25141 allow for the output of only selected
25142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25150 while maintaining the actual counters (pagination etc.) and references (please refer to the section
25153 \begin_inset space ~
25161 \begin_inset space ~
25166 manual for details).
25169 \begin_layout Standard
25172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25179 is the preferred method for chapters that are outsourced to child documents,
25181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25188 is more suitable for arbitrary file inheritance.
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25200 included file allows you to include a file typeset exactly as it appears in the file,
25202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25206 \begin_inset space \space{}
25210 \begin_inset Flex Code
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 with the characters set in a fixed-width typewriter font.
25222 spaces in this file are invisible,
25223 though two consecutive spaces are conserved,
25224 unlike \SpecialChar LyX
25225 's normal treatment of spaces.
25228 \begin_inset Flex Noun
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 \begin_inset space ~
25237 \begin_inset space ~
25241 \begin_inset space ~
25249 checkbox typesets a mark to unambiguously define the presence of a space.
25253 \begin_layout Standard
25255 the master file is converted into a full \SpecialChar LaTeX
25256 file before typesetting,
25257 while the included files are converted to \SpecialChar LaTeX
25258 files that do not have all the preamble information.
25261 \begin_layout Subsection
25262 Cross-References Between Files
25265 \begin_layout Standard
25266 \begin_inset Box Shadowbox
25276 height_special "totalheight"
25281 backgroundcolor "none"
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 This section is somewhat out of date.
25286 Need to describe default master documents and how children are opened when the master is.
25295 \begin_layout Standard
25296 It is possible to set up cross-references between the different files.
25298 open all the files in question:
25299 let's call them A and B in a two file example,
25300 where B is included in A.
25301 Let's say you insert a label in A,
25302 then want to reference it in B.
25303 Open the cross-reference dialog whilst in document B,
25304 and you can select the
25305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25315 \begin_layout Subsection
25316 Bibliography Lists in all Subdocuments
25319 \begin_layout Standard
25320 If you work with child documents,
25321 you might want to have only one main bibliography at the end,
25322 but still be able to have a selected bibliography for the child if you output it on its own.
25323 Here is how to achieve this.
25326 \begin_layout Standard
25327 For the main document,
25328 you just insert a bibliography inset at the place where the main bibliography has to appear (within the master file or within a child).
25329 If the bibliography inset is in the master file,
25330 the references will be inherited by all children,
25331 so they are available in the citation dialog within each child.
25334 \begin_layout Standard
25335 For child-specific bibliographies,
25336 insert bibliography insets within the child documents,
25337 at the place where the bibliography should appear when the child is compiled separately.
25339 the trick is to insert them into a branch (
25341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25342 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
25343 Insert New Branch...
25347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25360 Within the children,
25361 activate the branch (
25363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25364 Settings...\SpecialChar menuseparator
25369 deactivate the branch (
25371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25372 Settings...\SpecialChar menuseparator
25376 Now the child's bibliography will be ignored by the master,
25377 but considered by the child.
25380 \begin_layout Standard
25381 If you need multiple bibliographies (e.
25382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25386 one per child in the
25391 please refer to sec.
25392 \begin_inset space ~
25396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25398 reference "subsec:Multiple-Bibliographies"
25406 \begin_layout Section
25411 \begin_layout Standard
25412 Users sometimes need to be able to
25413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25421 file together with all the images (and other files) on which it depends,
25422 either for sending to a publisher or for sharing with a co-author.
25424 includes a Python script (
25425 \begin_inset Flex Code
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 ) that automates this process.
25436 you must have either the
25437 \begin_inset Flex Code
25440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Flex Code
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 python modules installed on your system.
25458 the script prefers the
25459 \begin_inset Flex Code
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Flex Code
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 format on Unix-like systems and the
25479 \begin_inset Flex Code
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25493 's configuration process will set the script up to export a `\SpecialChar LyX
25495 and this format will then be available under
25496 \begin_inset Flex Code
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
25509 \begin_layout Standard
25510 Independently of the platform,
25511 the generation of a particular archive format can be forced by adding either the
25512 \begin_inset Flex Code
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25522 \begin_inset Flex Code
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25532 \begin_inset Flex Code
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_inset Flex Code
25545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 format) switch to the
25552 \begin_inset Flex Code
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25557 \SpecialChar menuseparator
25565 \begin_inset Flex Code
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
25570 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
25571 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
25578 (Make sure you add the switch after the script name,
25582 \begin_layout Section
25583 Fancy Headers and Footers
25586 \begin_layout Standard
25587 The default page layout is rather plain;
25589 \begin_inset Flex Code
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25599 all you get is a centered page number at the bottom of the page.
25600 This document uses KOMA-script's book class,
25601 so it appears to be a bit fancier.
25602 But to really put on a show,
25603 you need to set the document page style to
25604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25612 as mentioned in the
25617 This section describes the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25618 code you need to insert in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
25619 preamble in order to get the desired effects.
25622 \begin_layout Standard
25623 For more information on fancy headers,
25625 \begin_inset Flex Code
25628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25634 package documentation.
25636 \begin_inset Flex URL
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25641 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/fancyhdr.html
25649 \begin_layout Standard
25650 The page header is divided into three fields,
25651 not surprisingly labeled
25652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25678 The footer is also divided into these three fields.
25679 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
25680 commands to set these fields in the simplest manner are
25681 \begin_inset Flex Code
25684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 \begin_inset Flex Code
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_inset Flex Code
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_inset Flex Code
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 Suppose you wish to put your name in the upper left hand corner of each page.
25734 Simply insert the following command in the preamble:
25738 \begin_layout Standard
25747 \begin_layout Standard
25748 You will now see your name in the upper left.
25749 If a field has a default entry that you would like to get rid of (often the page number appears in the central footer) simply include a command with a blank argument,
25751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25757 \begin_layout Standard
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25766 Let's get really fancy:
25767 lets put the section number with the word
25768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25780 \begin_inset space \space{}
25783 Section 3) in the upper left,
25784 the page number (e.
25785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25789 \begin_inset space \space{}
25792 Page 4) in the upper right,
25793 your name in the lower left,
25794 and the date in the lower right.
25795 The following commands should now appear in the preamble:
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25808 \begin_layout Standard
25816 \begin_layout Standard
25826 \begin_layout Standard
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25855 \begin_inset Flex Code
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 \begin_inset Flex Code
25870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 access \SpecialChar LaTeX
25879 's section and page counters,
25880 and so print out the current section and page number.
25882 \begin_inset Flex Code
25885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25893 simply prints out today's date.
25896 \begin_layout Standard
25897 The thicknesses of the horizontal rules drawn beneath the header and above the footer can also be modified.
25898 If you don't want one of the rules,
25899 set its thickness to 0.
25900 The header rule has a default thickness of 0.4pt,
25901 the footer rule is 0pt.
25907 \begin_inset Flex Code
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25915 headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
25921 \begin_inset Flex Code
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25929 footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
25934 to set the thicknesses.
25937 \begin_layout Standard
25938 You can switch the header/footer settings on and off for individual pages using commands like
25939 \begin_inset Flex Code
25942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25945 thispagestyle{empty}
25952 \begin_inset Flex Code
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25958 thispagestyle{plain}
25965 \begin_inset Flex Code
25968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25971 thispagestyle{fancy}
25977 Simply insert them in the text on the page you want changed and mark them as \SpecialChar TeX
25980 title pages are marked as plain by default,
25981 while following pages are marked fancy when using the global fancy setting.
25984 \begin_layout Standard
25985 As a final example,
25986 it is possible to include an image in the header or footer.
25987 Suppose you want to put a company logo in the upper lefthand corner.
25988 You might try something like
25991 \begin_layout Standard
26000 includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
26003 \begin_layout Standard
26005 (you may need to preface this with
26006 \begin_inset Flex Code
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 usepackage{graphics}
26017 if you don't include graphics elsewhere in your document).
26020 \begin_layout Chapter
26022 and the World Wide Web
26025 \begin_layout Standard
26027 has long supported the export of documents to various web-friendly formats,
26029 Before version 2.0,
26031 HTML export was always accomplished by the use of external converters.
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 For details on the use of external converters with \SpecialChar LyX
26042 section of the Customization manual.
26047 These fall into two large groups:
26048 there are converters that use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26049 as an intermediate format,
26051 \begin_inset Flex Code
26054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 \begin_inset Flex Code
26065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 \begin_inset Flex Code
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26083 relying upon \SpecialChar LyX
26084 to produce the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26086 and there is a converter that works directly on \SpecialChar LyX
26089 \begin_inset Flex Code
26092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26100 All of these have different advantages and disadvantages.
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
26106 -based converters have the advantage that,
26108 they know everything about the exported document that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26110 Such converters do not care,
26112 if a certain block of code was produced by \SpecialChar LyX
26113 or was Evil Red Text.
26114 These converters know about
26115 \begin_inset Flex Code
26118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 and can often make use of the
26128 \begin_inset Flex Code
26131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 files generated by Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26141 is a very hard language to parse—
26142 it is sometimes said that only \SpecialChar TeX
26143 itself understands \SpecialChar TeX
26145 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
26146 -based converters will often choke on what seem to be quite simple constructs;
26147 complex ones can throw them completely,
26148 and as of this writing,
26154 manual will not export with
26155 \begin_inset Flex Code
26158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26165 though the others will.
26166 The other issue concerns how math is handled.
26167 These converters typically convert the formulae into little pictures that are then linked from the HTML document.
26168 Since these are actually generated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26171 But they do not scale well,
26172 and just getting them to look as if they are actually meant to be in your document—
26173 so that the font sizes seem to be roughly the same—
26174 can be a challenge.
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26179 \begin_inset Flex Code
26182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26192 name "http://pinchito.es/elyxer/"
26193 target "http://pinchito.es/elyxer/"
26198 ) solves some of these problems.
26200 the formulae it produces scale perfectly,
26201 since it renders math using a combination of HTML and CSS rather than converting the formulae to images.
26202 But even moderately complex formula are rendered less well than with
26203 \begin_inset Flex Code
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 this reflects the limitations of HTML.
26217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26220 \begin_inset Flex Code
26223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26230 can also use jsMath and MathJax for equations,
26231 but this setting is only available globally and requires one to have access to a server that runs the backend.
26236 More importantly (as of version 1.1.1,
26239 \begin_inset Flex Code
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26249 has limited support for math macros and no support for user-defined paragraph or character styles.
26250 These limitations make
26251 \begin_inset Flex Code
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 unsuitable for many of the documents \SpecialChar LyX
26265 these problems could be solved,
26266 but the \SpecialChar LyX
26267 developers have decided to follow a different path and have made \SpecialChar LyX
26268 itself capable of writing XHTML,
26269 just as it is capable of writing \SpecialChar LaTeX
26275 \begin_layout Standard
26276 As of this writing,
26277 XHTML output remains under development and should probably be regarded as
26278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 \begin_inset Flex Code
26294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 development/HTML/HTML.notes
26301 which can be found in the \SpecialChar LyX
26303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26305 name "accessed online"
26306 target "https://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxgit/development/HTML/HTML.notes?rev=master"
26312 usually contains up-to-date information about the state of XHTML output.
26313 See also the list of XHTML bugs on
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26316 name "the bug tracker"
26317 target "https://www.lyx.org/trac/query?status=reopened&status=assigned&status=new&max=0&component=xhtml+export&order=id&col=id&col=summary&col=reporter&col=keywords&keywords=%21%7Efixedintrunk&desc=1"
26328 the developers have chosen this approach because it has several potential advantages over the other two.
26331 \begin_layout Standard
26332 These advantages are primarily due to the fact that the XHTML output routines,
26333 since they are part of \SpecialChar LyX
26335 know everything \SpecialChar LyX
26336 knows about the document being exported.
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26341 Another advantage is that,
26342 since these routines are internal to \SpecialChar LyX
26344 they are immune to changes in \SpecialChar LyX
26346 or to changes in the semantics of existing insets.
26351 So they know about the table of contents (as displayed in the outline),
26352 about the counters associated with different paragraph styles,
26353 and about user-defined styles.
26354 The XHTML output routines know what \SpecialChar LyX
26355 knows about internationalization,
26357 so they will output
26358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26378 depending upon the language in effect at the time.
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26384 the output routines know what \SpecialChar LyX
26385 knows about document layout,
26387 about how the document is to be rendered on screen.
26388 We use this information when we output the document as XHTML.
26395 generates CSS style information corresponding to the layout information it uses to render the document on screen:
26396 if section headings are supposed to be sans-serif and bold as seen in \SpecialChar LyX
26398 then (by default) they will be sans-serif and bold when viewed in a web browser,
26400 And this is true not just for pre-defined styles,
26403 including user-defined styles.
26405 the XHTML output routines make no distinction between user-defined paragraph and
26406 \change_deleted 244031559 1603876931
26408 \change_inserted 244031559 1603876940
26411 styles and \SpecialChar LyX
26412 's own pre-defined styles:
26414 everything \SpecialChar LyX
26415 knows about the styles is contained in the layout files.
26416 And much the same is true as regards pre-defined textual insets,
26418 and various custom insets.
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 The result is that XHTML output can be customized and extended in exactly the same way \SpecialChar LaTeX
26424 output can be customized and extended:
26425 through layout files and modules.
26426 See chapter five of the
26430 manual for the details.
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 The remainder of this chapter contains more detailed information on XHTML output,
26436 and ways to work around those limitations.
26439 \begin_layout Section
26440 Math Output in XHTML
26443 \begin_layout Standard
26445 offers four choices for how math is rendered.
26446 These have various advantages and disadvantages:
26449 \begin_layout Itemize
26451 \begin_inset Newline newline
26454 MathML is a dialect of XML designed specifically for mathematics on the web,
26455 and it typically renders very well in browsers that support it.
26456 The disadvantage is that not all browsers support MathML,
26457 and support is not complete even in the Gecko-based browsers,
26459 \begin_inset Newline newline
26462 If \SpecialChar LyX
26463 is unable to render a formula as MathML—
26465 if the formula uses the
26466 \begin_inset Flex Code
26469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 then it will instead output the formula as an image.
26480 \begin_layout Itemize
26482 \begin_inset Newline newline
26485 As mentioned above,
26487 \begin_inset Flex Code
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 outputs math as HTML,
26501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 has borrowed some of the CSS for its HTML output from
26504 \begin_inset Flex Code
26507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 For simple formulae,
26519 this can work quite well,
26520 though with more complicated formulae it tends to break down.
26522 this method has the advantage that it is very widely supported and so it may be appropriate for documents that contain only a little,
26523 fairly simple math.
26524 \begin_inset Newline newline
26527 If Lyx is unable to render a formula as HTML—
26529 if the formula uses the
26530 \begin_inset Flex Code
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26540 then it will instead output the formula as an image.
26544 \begin_layout Itemize
26546 \begin_inset Newline newline
26550 \begin_inset Flex Code
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 will output formulae as images,
26562 the very same images,
26564 that are used for instant preview.
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 Instant preview does
26573 have to be on for images to be output,
26579 The advantage to this method is that the images are simply generated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26581 so they are very accurate.
26583 as mentioned earlier,
26584 is that these are bitmapped images,
26585 so they do not scale terribly well,
26586 and one cannot copy them,
26588 \begin_inset Newline newline
26591 The size of the images can be controlled by setting the
26592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26595 Math Images Scaling
26596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26600 \begin_inset Flex Noun
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26605 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 For those who want to know,
26617 this controls the resolution of the image in dots per inch and is based upon a default of 75 dpi.
26623 \begin_inset Newline newline
26626 If \SpecialChar LyX
26627 for some reason fails to create an image for a formula (e.g.,
26628 if a required \SpecialChar LaTeX
26629 package is not installed),
26630 then it will fall back to outputing the raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
26634 \begin_layout Itemize
26637 \begin_inset Newline newline
26642 will happily output math as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26644 As well as being the output of last resort,
26645 this method can be used with such tools as
26646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26649 target "http://www.math.union.edu/~dpvc/jsMath/"
26655 which uses JavaScript to render \SpecialChar LaTeX
26656 embedded in HTML documents.
26658 wraps the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26660 \begin_inset Flex Code
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 (for inline formulas) or
26670 \begin_inset Flex Code
26673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 (for displayed formulas) with
26680 \begin_inset Flex Code
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 as is required for jsMath.
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26694 One of these output methods must be selected under
26695 \begin_inset Flex Noun
26698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26700 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26710 This is a document-wide setting,
26714 \begin_layout Standard
26717 will offer the user the option to select an alternate output method for a particular inset,
26719 one that isn't being rendered very well by MathML.
26723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26725 since \SpecialChar LyX
26726 falls back to images if the inset contains ERT,
26727 then one can force output as an image by putting some harmless ERT into the math,
26730 \begin_inset Formula $a=b\relax$
26741 \begin_layout Section
26742 Bibliography and Citations
26745 \begin_layout Standard
26746 XHTML output fully supports bibliographies and citations.
26750 \begin_layout Standard
26751 Citation labels are generated by the same machinery that generates \SpecialChar LyX
26752 's on-screen labels,
26753 so the labels will look in the output much as they do in \SpecialChar LyX
26756 If you are using numerical citations,
26757 then \SpecialChar LyX
26758 will output numerical labels,
26759 such as [1] or [17],
26760 rather than simply showing the citation key in square brackets,
26761 as it does on-screen.
26762 If you are using author-year citations,
26763 then \SpecialChar LyX
26764 will add lowercase letters to the years,
26765 just as Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26767 if it finds more than one citation for a given author-year combination.
26768 The labels will be printed with the bibliography entries.
26769 Note that there is,
26771 no way to customize the appearance of the labels,
26773 to choose between square brackets and parentheses.
26776 \begin_layout Standard
26777 Bibliography output is handled by the same machinery that handles the presentation of reference information in the citation dialog,
26778 so you will see in the XHTML output pretty much what you would see if you were to look at a given entry in the citation dialog.
26779 The formatting can be customized in your layout file or,
26786 manual for the details.
26789 \begin_layout Standard
26790 The main defect at present is that cross-referenced information is printed with every entry with which it is associated.
26791 So you can see things like this:
26794 \begin_layout Quote
26797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26800 Context and Logical Form
26801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26807 Language in Context:
26811 Oxford University Press,
26817 \begin_layout Quote
26820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26823 Semantics in Context
26824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26830 Language in Context:
26834 Oxford University Press,
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 This should be fixed before long.
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 There is no support at present for sectioned bibliographies.
26846 If you have multiple bibliographies,
26847 then \SpecialChar LyX
26848 will print the same bibliography over and over.
26851 \begin_layout Section
26855 \begin_layout Standard
26857 will happily export indexes as XHTML,
26858 but with certain limitations at the moment.
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26862 Index export will be most reliable when you do not attempt to use the fancy constructs that are described in the section on indexes in the
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 The main issue here is that \SpecialChar LyX
26872 itself does not really handle these.
26873 It just lets you enter what you would have to enter in raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
26879 We'll describe how they are handled using the subsection headings from that section.
26882 \begin_layout Itemize
26883 Grouping Index Entries (aka,
26886 makes an effort to support these,
26887 but the entries must be separated by
26888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26898 there must be spaces around the exclamation point.
26899 This is because it is otherwise too difficult to check for escaped exclamation points,
26904 \begin_layout Itemize
26906 There is no support at all for page ranges,
26907 since these make no sense with XHMTL.
26909 you will just get two index entries,
26913 \begin_layout Itemize
26915 There is no support for cross-referencing.
26916 If \SpecialChar LyX
26917 finds an entry containing the
26918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26921 |see\SpecialChar ldots
26923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26927 it is just dropped,
26928 and the rest is treated as an ordinary index entry.
26931 \begin_layout Itemize
26934 does support attempts to fix the sorting order.
26935 It will take what is before the first `@' it finds and use that for sorting,
26936 taking what follows the first `@' to be the actual entry.
26939 does not check for escaped `@',
26940 so do not try to index email addresses.
26943 \begin_layout Itemize
26944 Index Entry Layout:
26945 You can format entries by using the text style dialog,
26946 or by using any other method available within \SpecialChar LyX
26948 There is no support for constructs like:
26950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26959 if \SpecialChar LyX
26960 finds a pipe symbol,
26963 it will delete it and everything that follows it.
26966 \begin_layout Itemize
26968 There is no support for multiple indexes.
26970 all index entries will be printed as one large index.
26971 To avoid our printing several versions of the index,
26972 we print only the main index,
26973 so make sure you have one.
26976 \begin_layout Section
26977 Nomenclature and Glossary
26980 \begin_layout Standard
26981 There is at present no support for glossaries.
26982 Adding it would be fairly trivial,
26986 \begin_layout Chapter
26988 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534180
26992 \begin_layout Standard
26994 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534386
26997 can generate documents in the DocBook XML vocabulary.
26998 With versions 2.3 and before,
26999 only select templates could be used to generate DocBook documents (only version 4).
27000 Starting with \SpecialChar LyX
27002 most \SpecialChar LyX
27003 layouts can generate valid DocBook documents (only version 5).
27004 This feature is built into \SpecialChar LyX
27005 and does not require the use of external tools.
27008 \begin_layout Standard
27010 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534437
27011 The result is that the DocBook output can be customized and extended in exactly the same way \SpecialChar LaTeX
27012 output can be customized and extended:
27013 through layout files and modules.
27014 See chapter five of the
27018 manual for the details.
27021 \begin_layout Standard
27023 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534475
27024 Most \SpecialChar LyX
27025 features are supported with DocBook,
27029 \begin_layout Itemize
27031 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534741
27032 Math output is performed mostly in MathML (the major exception being constructions not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
27036 All formulae are also available in raw \SpecialChar TeX
27037 in the DocBook output for further processing.
27040 \begin_layout Itemize
27042 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534852
27043 Bibliographies and citations are implemented,
27044 including with an external BibTeX file.
27045 Bibliography entries are not prerendered when the detailed information are available,
27046 but rather output with the standard DocBook constructs.
27047 The external DocBook processor is expected to handle the rendering of entries.
27050 \begin_layout Itemize
27052 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534863
27053 Indexes are supported,
27054 including multiple indices.
27061 and cross-references (
27066 with the exception of the same symbols escaped.
27075 ) are not supported.
27076 There is no support for escaping of index entries.
27079 \begin_layout Itemize
27081 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534884
27082 Glossaries are implemented.
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27087 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534894
27088 Two major parameters can be set at the document level.
27091 \begin_layout Itemize
27093 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616534948
27096 can generate tables either as HTML (default value) or CALS,
27097 depending on the user's requirements.
27098 Most DocBook processors accept both formats.
27101 \begin_layout Itemize
27103 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535006
27106 MathML is included within its own name space,
27108 The implication is that there must be an indication of the tags belonging to the MathML standard.
27109 Three choices are offered:
27114 \begin_layout Itemize
27116 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535044
27118 the MathML name space is defined for each formula (using the
27122 attribute on each formula)
27125 \begin_layout Itemize
27127 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616535090
27133 the MathML name space is defined at the document level (using the
27137 attribute on the root element).
27138 Each MathML is prefixed with
27149 \begin_layout Itemize
27151 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616620405
27167 \begin_layout Standard
27169 \change_inserted 1075283030 1616620470
27170 This option is especially useful if you want \SpecialChar LyX
27171 to match your personal style or to work with buggy software that only accepts one prefix for MathML.
27177 \begin_layout Chapter
27178 The \SpecialChar LyX
27182 \begin_layout Section
27186 \begin_layout Standard
27187 The `\SpecialChar LyX
27188 server' allows other programs to talk to \SpecialChar LyX
27190 invoke \SpecialChar LyX
27192 and retrieve information about the \SpecialChar LyX
27194 This is only intended for advanced users,
27195 but they should find it useful.
27196 It is by writing to the \SpecialChar LyX
27199 that bibliography managers,
27202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27209 citations to \SpecialChar LyX
27213 \begin_layout Section
27214 Starting the \SpecialChar LyX
27216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27218 name "sec:Starting-the-Server"
27225 \begin_layout Standard
27226 The \SpecialChar LyX
27227 server works through the use of a pair of named pipes.
27228 These are usually located in
27229 \begin_inset Flex Code
27232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 (except on Windows,
27244 named pipes are special objects located in
27245 \begin_inset Flex Code
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27260 ) and have the names
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27265 \begin_inset Flex Code
27268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27283 \begin_inset Flex Code
27286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27297 External programs write into
27298 \begin_inset Flex Code
27301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 and read back data from
27308 \begin_inset Flex Code
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 The stem of the pipe names can be defined in the
27319 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27331 \begin_inset Flex Code
27334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27335 "/home/myhome/lyxpipe"
27342 \begin_inset Flex Code
27345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 on Windows (where any working path instead of lyxpipe can be used,
27361 \begin_inset Flex Code
27364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27387 configure this manually in order for the server to start.
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27393 \begin_inset Flex Code
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27403 \begin_inset Flex Code
27406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 ' to create the pipes.
27413 If one of the pipes already exists,
27415 will assume that another \SpecialChar LyX
27416 process is already running and will not start the server.
27417 On POSIX (Unix like) systems,
27418 if for some other reason,
27420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27427 pipe is left in existence when \SpecialChar LyX
27429 then \SpecialChar LyX
27430 will try to delete it.
27431 If this fails for some reason,
27432 you will need to delete the pipes manually and then restart \SpecialChar LyX
27435 pipes are deleted by the OS on program termination or crash,
27437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27444 pipes should not be possible.
27447 \begin_layout Standard
27448 To have several \SpecialChar LyX
27449 processes with servers at the same time,
27450 you have to use different configurations,
27451 perhaps by using separate user directories,
27453 \begin_inset Flex Code
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27467 If you are developing a client program,
27468 you might find it useful to enable debugging information from the \SpecialChar LyX
27470 Do this by starting \SpecialChar LyX
27472 \begin_inset Flex Code
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27484 \begin_layout Standard
27485 You can find a complete example client written in C++ in the source distribution as
27486 \begin_inset Flex Code
27489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27490 development/lyxserver/server_monitor.cpp
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 Another useful tool is the command-line based client found in
27500 \begin_inset Flex Code
27503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27504 src/client/lyxclient
27512 \begin_layout Section
27513 Normal communication
27516 \begin_layout Standard
27517 To issue a \SpecialChar LyX
27519 the client writes a line of ASCII text into the input pipe.
27520 This line has the following format:
27523 \begin_layout Quote
27537 \begin_layout Description
27538 clientname is a name that the client can choose arbitrarily.
27539 Its only use is that \SpecialChar LyX
27540 will echo it if it sends an answer—
27541 so a client can dispatch results from different requesters.
27544 \begin_layout Description
27545 function is the function you want \SpecialChar LyX
27547 It is the same as the commands you'd use in the minibuffer.
27550 \begin_layout Description
27551 argument is an optional argument which is meaningful only to some functions (for instance,
27553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27560 LFUN will insert the argument as text at the cursor position).
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 The answer from \SpecialChar LyX
27565 will arrive in the output pipe and be of the form
27568 \begin_layout Quote
27582 \begin_layout Standard
27591 are just echoed from the command request,
27596 is more or less useful information filled according to how the command execution worked out.
27599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27607 will return information about the internal state of \SpecialChar LyX
27609 while other will return an empty data-response.
27610 This means that the command execution went fine.
27613 \begin_layout Standard
27615 the response from \SpecialChar LyX
27616 will have this form
27619 \begin_layout Quote
27633 \begin_layout Standard
27638 should contain an explanation of why the command failed.
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27645 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27646 echo "LYXCMD:test:beginning-of-buffer:" >~/.lyxpipe.in
27647 \begin_inset Newline newline
27650 echo "LYXCMD:test:get-xy:" >~/.lyxpipe.in
27651 \begin_inset Newline newline
27654 read a <~/.lyxpipe.out
27655 \begin_inset Newline newline
27661 \begin_layout Subsection
27662 AppleScript (Mac OS X)
27665 \begin_layout Standard
27666 Since \SpecialChar LyX
27669 supports basic interactions with AppleScript for normal communication through the command run.
27670 This command takes a direct argument (the
27674 to perform) and an optional argument.
27675 It either returns the output of the function or triggers an error with the error message and code.
27678 \begin_layout Standard
27682 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27683 tell application "\SpecialChar LyX
27687 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27692 -- Stores the current file name into f
27695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27696 set f to (run "server-get-filename" with argument "")
27699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27700 on error the error_message number the error_number
27703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27704 display dialog "Error:
27705 " & the error_number & ".
27709 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27710 & the error_message buttons {"OK"} default button 1
27713 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27717 \begin_layout LyX-Code
27721 \begin_layout Section
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27727 can notify clients of events going on asynchronously.
27728 Currently it will only do this if the user binds a key sequence with the function
27729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27737 The format of the string \SpecialChar LyX
27738 sends is as follows:
27741 \begin_layout Quote
27742 \begin_inset Flex Code
27745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27756 \begin_layout Standard
27761 is the printed representation of the key sequence that was actually typed by the user.
27764 \begin_layout Standard
27765 This mechanism can be used to extend \SpecialChar LyX
27766 's command set and implement macros.
27767 Bind some key sequence to
27768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27776 Then start a client that listens on the output pipe,
27777 dispatches the command according to the sequence,
27778 and starts a function that may use \SpecialChar LyX
27779 calls and \SpecialChar LyX
27780 requests to issue a command or a series of commands to \SpecialChar LyX
27784 \begin_layout Section
27785 The simple \SpecialChar LyX
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27791 implements a simple protocol that can be used for session management.
27792 All messages are of the form
27795 \begin_layout Quote
27805 \begin_layout Standard
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 is received from a client,
27837 will report back to inform the client that it's listening to it's messages,
27839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27846 sent from \SpecialChar LyX
27847 will inform clients that \SpecialChar LyX
27851 \begin_layout Section
27852 Reverse DVI/PDF search
27855 \begin_layout Standard
27856 Some DVI/PDF viewers
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 The following viewers offer the reverse PDF search feature:
27862 Okular on KDE/Linux,
27864 Skim on Mac OSX and SumatraPDF on Windows.
27873 facility (also called
27878 This means that you can tell \SpecialChar LyX
27879 to put the cursor to a specific line in the document by clicking at the respective position in the DVI/PDF output.
27881 the viewer must be able to communicate with \SpecialChar LyX
27883 This is done via the \SpecialChar LyX
27884 server either by using the named pipe (
27889 or the UNIX domain socket (
27893 ) that \SpecialChar LyX
27894 creates in its temporary directory (this is the way the
27895 \begin_inset Flex Code
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27904 program communicates with \SpecialChar LyX
27907 you need a helper script that mediates between the viewer and \SpecialChar LyX
27910 the viewer can communicate with \SpecialChar LyX
27912 This depends on the selected viewer and on your operating system.
27913 The same applies to the way viewers need to be configured and the way the reverse search is actually performed.
27915 we will thus describe how to setup reverse search for specific viewers.
27916 Before we turn to this,
27918 we will explain what needs to be done generally to enable reverse search in the DVI/PDF output.
27921 \begin_layout Subsection
27923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27925 name "subsec:rev-search"
27932 \begin_layout Standard
27933 In most cases \SpecialChar LyX
27934 will do the work for you by pressing the following button in the toolbar:
27938 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
27943 you can also enable the feature by checking
27945 Synchronize with Output
27948 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27960 In such a case \SpecialChar LyX
27961 will automatically insert the necessary Sync\SpecialChar TeX
27962 macro (for PDF) or load the srcltx package (for DVI) respectively.
27963 This option can be easily reached also on
27964 \begin_inset Flex Code
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_layout Standard
27977 If you need a different setting,
27978 you can select or input a custom macro from the drop down box just below
27979 \begin_inset Flex Noun
27982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27984 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27985 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27986 Synchronize with Output
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 Note that the method
27996 \begin_inset Flex Code
27999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28007 enables gzip compression.
28008 If your viewer does not support it,
28009 you should instead use
28010 \begin_inset Flex Code
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 Please also note that including the
28026 \begin_inset Flex Code
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28036 \begin_inset Flex Code
28039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28045 sometimes has an undesired impact on the typesetting.
28047 you should switch output synchronization off for the final typesetting if you use the
28048 \begin_inset Flex Code
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28058 \begin_inset Flex Code
28061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28072 In case you need some more special settings that are not covered by the automatic settings,
28073 read the next section about how to set up output synchronization manually.
28074 If the automatic setup suits your needs,
28075 you can readily jump to section
28076 \begin_inset space ~
28080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28082 reference "subsec:configuring-viewers"
28088 where the necessary configuration steps in your viewer – needed both with the automatic and the manual setup – are described.
28091 \begin_layout Subsection
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28097 provides several different methods for reverse search.
28098 Some are built-in in the
28099 \begin_inset Flex Code
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 some are provided by external packages.
28110 Your choice depends on whether your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28111 distribution already provides a given method (the built-in methods are rather new) and whether your viewer can cope with it.
28112 The available methods are described in the following.
28115 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28116 Built-in DVI-search via src-specials (DVI only)
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28120 This method provides the DVI file with the necessary information for reverse search.
28121 It is available in \SpecialChar LaTeX
28122 since quite some time (any somewhat recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28123 distribution should include it),
28124 and it works reliably.
28127 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28155 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28159 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28160 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28167 \begin_inset Flex Code
28170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28171 latex -src-specials $$i
28177 If this doesn't work,
28178 check if your \SpecialChar TeX
28179 engine needs different options (the syntax might differ in some distributions).
28182 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28183 External Packages (PDFSync and scrltx)
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28195 provide reverse search facility for PDF output (via pdflatex) and DVI output,
28197 In order to enable it,
28198 load the packages in the \SpecialChar LyX
28203 \begin_layout Itemize
28204 \begin_inset Flex Code
28207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 usepackage{pdfsync}
28215 for reverse PDF search,
28218 \begin_layout Itemize
28219 \begin_inset Flex Code
28222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 usepackage[active]{srcltx}
28230 for reverse DVI search.
28233 \begin_layout Standard
28234 If you want to be able to perform both DVI and PDF reverse searches,
28235 you can also insert in the preamble the following lines
28238 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28242 \begin_inset Newline newline
28248 \begin_inset Newline newline
28253 usepackage{pdfsync}
28254 \begin_inset Newline newline
28260 \begin_inset Newline newline
28265 usepackage[active]{srcltx}
28266 \begin_inset Newline newline
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28276 you can preview the file as either DVI or PDF (pdflatex) and the right package will be used.
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28280 Note that PDFSync might affect the output layout of your document.
28281 It is therefore advised to disable PDFsync for final documents.
28284 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28285 Built-in reverse search via Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28289 \begin_layout Standard
28291 \begin_inset Flex Code
28294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28300 have built-in support for both PDF and DVI reverse search.
28303 Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28306 facility is basically the result of the integration of the PDFSync package to the pdftex program and its merge with the
28311 You need at least \SpecialChar TeX
28312 Live 2008 or a recent Mik\SpecialChar TeX
28313 distribution in order to use it.
28317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 Mik\SpecialChar TeX
28320 does not understand/obey the command \SpecialChar LyX
28321 inserts into the preamble when you check the "Enable Forward/Reverse Search" button in the toolbar and does not generate the necessary info.
28324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28325 The generation of the required info can be forced by changing the converter "\SpecialChar LaTeX
28326 (pdflatex) -> PDF (pdflatex)" in Preferences->File handling->Converters from the default "pdflatex $$i" to "pdflatex -synctex=1 $$i" (i.e.,
28327 by adding the -synctex=1 switch).
28332 Also note that only a few PDF viewers (such as Okular and Qpdfview on Unix,
28334 SumatraPDF on Windows;
28335 see the next section for details) already provide Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28339 \begin_layout Standard
28340 To enable Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28343 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 (plain) -> DraftDVI
28371 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28376 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28383 \begin_inset Flex Code
28386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28387 latex -synctex=1 $$i
28393 and for PDF output,
28395 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 (pdflatex) -> PDF (pdflatex)
28409 \begin_inset Flex Code
28412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 pdflatex -synctex=1 $$i
28419 Should your viewer not be considered in the following description,
28420 or in case of missing success,
28421 please check the documentation of your viewer whether the viewer needs to be configured for the use with Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28427 Note that the option
28428 \begin_inset Flex Code
28431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 option enables gzip compression.
28438 If your viewer does not support it,
28439 you should instead use
28440 \begin_inset Flex Code
28443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28457 \begin_layout Subsection
28458 Configuring and using specific viewers
28459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28461 name "subsec:configuring-viewers"
28468 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28469 Xdvi (all platforms)
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28474 \begin_inset Flex Code
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 you don't need to do anything else for performing a reverse DVI search,
28485 as \SpecialChar LyX
28486 already provides the necessary hooks for automatically using the
28487 \begin_inset Flex Code
28490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28497 Just setup your document as described above (reverse search is triggered by Ctrl-click or Alt-click on Mac OSX,
28501 \begin_layout Standard
28503 if for whatever reason you want to use the named pipe instead of the socket for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
28505 simply change the DVI viewer in
28506 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28510 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28511 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28522 On Mac OSX you have to use
28523 \begin_inset Flex Code
28526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28527 DISPLAY=:0.0 xdvi -editor "lyxeditor.sh %f %l"
28538 \begin_inset Flex Code
28541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 xdvi -editor "lyxeditor.sh %f %l"
28549 \begin_inset Flex Code
28552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28558 is a suitable script.
28560 a minimal shell script is the following one:
28563 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28565 \begin_inset Newline newline
28568 LYXPIPE="/path/to/lyxpipe"
28569 \begin_inset Newline newline
28572 COMMAND="LYXCMD:revdvi:server-goto-file-row:$1 $2"
28573 \begin_inset Newline newline
28576 echo "$COMMAND" > "${LYXPIPE}".in || exit
28577 \begin_inset Newline newline
28580 read TMP < "${LYXPIPE}".out || exit
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28585 \begin_inset Flex Code
28588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28594 is the LyXServer pipe path specified in
28595 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 \begin_inset Flex Code
28614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28620 folder of a source distribution you can find a
28621 \begin_inset Flex Code
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 script which is able to locate the
28634 based on your preferences.
28642 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28646 \begin_layout Standard
28648 \begin_inset Flex Code
28651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28652 /Applications/MacDviX_Folder/calleditor.script
28658 add the following lines:
28661 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28662 /Applications/LyX.app/Contents/MacOS/lyxeditor "$2" $1
28663 \begin_inset Newline newline
28669 \begin_layout Standard
28670 Modify the lines accordingly if you install \SpecialChar LyX
28671 somewhere else than in the Applications folder.
28674 \begin_layout Standard
28675 Reverse search is triggered by Alt-click (OPTION-click).
28678 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28684 \begin_inset Flex Code
28687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 open -a Skim.app $$i
28693 to the viewer setting in
28694 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28698 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28699 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
28700 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
28708 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28712 Skim\SpecialChar menuseparator
28713 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28720 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28729 preset and enter command
28730 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 /Applications/\SpecialChar LyX
28735 .app/Contents/MacOS/lyxeditor
28743 \begin_layout Standard
28744 Reverse search is triggered by COMMAND-SHIFT-click
28747 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28751 \begin_layout Standard
28752 Reverse search with evince does not work out of the box,
28753 but it can be achieved by means of some third party helper scripts.
28755 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28757 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/SyncTeX"
28765 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28769 \begin_layout Standard
28771 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28775 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28776 Configure Okular\SpecialChar menuseparator
28783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28787 This inserts the appropriate command (
28788 \begin_inset Flex Code
28791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 \begin_layout Standard
28801 Reverse search is triggered by SHIFT-click.
28803 \change_inserted -712698321 1578211026
28804 Note that this only works if Okular is in
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28817 the hand symbol is clicked).
28822 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28827 Qpdfview supports Sync\SpecialChar TeX
28828 since version 0.3.5.
28830 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28835 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28842 click on the input field of the
28843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28850 item and add the command
28851 \begin_inset Flex Code
28854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 \begin_layout Standard
28864 Reverse search is triggered by double-click or,
28865 in more recent versions,
28869 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
28873 \begin_layout Standard
28876 \begin_inset Flex Noun
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28886 menu and select the
28887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28899 New\SpecialChar ldots
28901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28905 in the window that opens,
28907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28915 (or any other name you like) in the
28916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28924 Now click on the button labeled
28925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28933 to open a file dialog and navigate to the directory containing the batch file
28934 \begin_inset Flex Code
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28945 \begin_inset Flex Code
28948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28954 and then specify the program arguments as
28955 \begin_inset Flex Code
28958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28966 \begin_inset Flex Code
28969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 wrapper is used for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
28983 \begin_layout LyX-Code
28985 \begin_inset Newline newline
28988 echo LYXCMD:revdvi:server-goto-file-row:%~1 %2>
28997 \begin_inset Newline newline
29011 \begin_layout Standard
29012 Make sure that the \SpecialChar LyX
29013 Server pipe path you specified in \SpecialChar LyX
29015 \begin_inset Flex Code
29018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29033 otherwise change the
29034 \begin_inset Flex Code
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29043 wrapper accordingly.
29046 \begin_layout Standard
29048 reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29051 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29052 SumatraPDF (Windows)
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 In order to use SumatraPDF for inverse search,
29058 \begin_inset Flex Code
29061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29062 SumatraPDF -inverse-search "lyxeditor.bat "%f" %l"
29067 in the viewer setting in
29068 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29072 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29073 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29074 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
29082 \begin_inset Flex Code
29085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29091 is the previous wrapper.
29092 If SumatraPDF.exe is not in your command PATH,
29093 use its full file name.
29096 \begin_layout Standard
29097 Reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29100 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29106 make sure that yap is your default DVI viewer in the Windows environment,
29109 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29119 menu and select the
29120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29132 New\SpecialChar ldots
29134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29138 in the window that opens,
29140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29148 (or any other name you like) in the
29149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29157 Now click on the button labeled
29158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29166 to open a file dialog and navigate to the directory containing the
29167 \begin_inset Flex Code
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 program (which is installed by default on Cygwin along with the \SpecialChar LyX
29179 \begin_inset Flex Code
29182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29188 and then specify the program arguments as
29189 \begin_inset Flex Code
29192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29200 you will be using the
29204 for communicating with \SpecialChar LyX
29207 for whatever reason,
29208 you want to use the
29214 \begin_inset Flex Code
29217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29223 option and be sure to specify the \SpecialChar LyX
29224 Server pipe path in the \SpecialChar LyX
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29230 reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29233 \begin_layout Subsubsection*
29234 SumatraPDF (Cygwin)
29237 \begin_layout Standard
29238 In order to use SumatraPDF for inverse search,
29240 \begin_inset Flex Code
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29244 SumatraPDF -inverse-search "lyxeditor -g %f %l"
29249 in the viewer setting in
29250 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29254 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29255 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29256 File formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
29263 If SumatraPDF.exe is not in your command PATH,
29264 use its full posix path.
29266 \begin_inset Flex Code
29269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 enables communication via the
29282 \begin_inset Flex Code
29285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29291 option if you want to use the
29296 and be sure to specify the \SpecialChar LyX
29297 Server pipe path in the \SpecialChar LyX
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29302 Reverse search is triggered by double-click.
29305 \begin_layout Section
29309 \begin_layout Standard
29311 as the name implies,
29313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29321 It allows you to let the viewer jump to a given position from within \SpecialChar LyX
29323 If forward search is set up (as described in what follows),
29324 you can put the cursor anywhere in your \SpecialChar LyX
29327 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29331 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
29338 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29347 in the context menu via right mouse click),
29348 and then the viewer will jump to that position as well.
29351 that your viewer supports this function.
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29355 To make forward search possible,
29356 you first need to provide the generated output PDF/DVI file with additional information about the \SpecialChar TeX
29358 This can be done via the methods described in the section
29359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29361 reference "subsec:rev-search"
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29371 you need to configure \SpecialChar LyX
29372 for using your viewers in
29373 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29378 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29379 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29386 We provide a range of tested configurations for some viewers,
29387 which you can select from the drop down list.
29388 If none of these configurations suits you,
29389 you have to find out and enter a suitable configuration yourself.
29390 The definition syntax uses the following placeholders:
29393 \begin_layout Itemize
29395 \begin_inset Flex Code
29398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29408 \begin_layout Itemize
29410 \begin_inset Flex Code
29413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 name of the (temporary) exported .tex file (without path)
29423 \begin_layout Itemize
29425 \begin_inset Flex Code
29428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29435 name of the (temporary) exported .tex file (including path)
29438 \begin_layout Itemize
29440 \begin_inset Flex Code
29443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29450 name of the exported output file (either dvi or pdf,
29451 depending on which one exists in the temporary directory)
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29455 Note that only some of the viewers provide full and usable forward search functionality out of the box,
29462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29463 You might want to set
29464 \begin_inset Flex Code
29467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 \begin_inset Flex Noun
29477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29479 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29480 File Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
29482 \begin_inset space ~
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 SumatraPDF can also use DDE commands through the external program CMCDDE —
29504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29506 target "http://www.istri.fr/spip/zip/CMCDDE.zip"
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29523 Forward search with evince can be achieved by means of third party helper scripts.
29525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29527 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/SyncTeX"
29538 require some extra tools in order to use forward search.
29539 While many of the widespread PDF viewers (most notably Adobe Reader) do not support forward search at all,
29540 some other viewers – e.
29541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29545 xpdf – allow at least to reload the document and jump to a specific page of the file,
29546 so you can at least navigate
29547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29555 This latter functionality is provided by an external call of synctex (see the predefined example configurations).
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 Forward search works both with DVI and PDF output.
29562 simply checks which preview format you have used before (i.
29563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29567 which format is already there in the temporary directory) and chooses the appropriate configuration for the respective format.
29568 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
29572 \begin_layout Standard
29574 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
29575 Special Document Classes
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29580 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29586 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29592 \begin_layout Standard
29594 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29600 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29601 This section describes how \SpecialChar LyX
29602 can be used to write articles for submission to the scientific journal
29604 Astronomy and Astrophysics
29607 \begin_inset Flex URL
29610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29612 https://www.aanda.org/
29617 ) using Version 5.01 of the document class
29622 This package can be downloaded from the ftp site
29625 \begin_layout Standard
29627 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29637 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29638 \begin_inset Flex URL
29641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29643 ftp://ftp.edpsciences.org/pub/aa/readme.html
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29653 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29654 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29660 \begin_layout Standard
29662 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29663 A manual comes together with that package,
29664 and this text is not meant to replace the original manual but is merely a short guide in how to realize the correct form of your paper.
29668 \begin_layout Standard
29670 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29671 Please note that the publisher of the journal was changed from Springer to EDP Sciences starting January 1,
29673 That change involved also some slight changes to the style files,
29674 namely the removal of the thesaurus command.
29675 The \SpecialChar LyX
29676 class aa supports the newest version of these style files,
29678 If you have an older version installed,
29681 the old (version 4) layout has been kept as
29686 Please refer to the comments in
29689 Dir/layouts/aapaper.layout
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29696 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29702 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29703 It is recommended you start from the example template distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
29705 If you are not using a template,
29706 note the following settings:
29709 \begin_layout Itemize
29711 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29722 that one was obvious).
29725 \begin_layout Itemize
29727 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29728 Don't change the option
29731 \begin_inset space ~
29742 The whole layout is done by the macros,
29743 you shouldn't change anything.
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29748 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29754 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29755 First thing to enter is the header information.
29756 It consists of seven entries,
29757 of which some are optional.
29761 \begin_layout Itemize
29763 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29772 \begin_layout Itemize
29774 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29783 \begin_layout Itemize
29785 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29794 \begin_layout Itemize
29796 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29805 \begin_layout Itemize
29807 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29813 [optional] if more than one author:
29814 whom to contact for offprint requests.
29817 \begin_layout Itemize
29819 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29825 [optional] mail address for contacts.
29828 \begin_layout Itemize
29830 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29837 Suggested format is
29844 \begin_layout Standard
29846 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29847 There is no need to issue the
29854 this is done automatically by \SpecialChar LyX
29855 when the header is finished.
29856 Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised to keep the above sequence,
29857 just to get the best optics and meets the layout of the real document.
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29862 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29863 If you want to place footnotes in the header block,
29865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29869 \begin_inset space \space{}
29872 to state your present address,
29873 just use the standard footnote via the menu
29875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29880 will automagically use the term
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29891 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29894 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29898 you'll find two insets which are relevant for the titling:
29901 \begin_layout Itemize
29903 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29910 to mark corresponding author\SpecialChar breakableslash
29912 The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
29917 so you have to put a marker to each author.
29920 \begin_layout Itemize
29922 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29927 to supply an email address for fast contact.
29930 \begin_layout Standard
29932 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29933 In addition to these topics,
29934 the macros use one additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
29935 command that has no counterpart in \SpecialChar LyX
29939 \begin_layout Itemize
29941 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29948 to separate different names for more than one author and institute,
29952 \begin_layout Standard
29954 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29955 The appropriate command has to be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29956 and marked as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29964 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29970 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29971 The abstract should immediately follow the header block.
29972 With version 5 the abstract environment was changed to a command,
29973 and there is now a restriction to only one paragraph.
29975 it should contain an entry with the keywords.
29976 This is done via the paragraph style
29981 Refer to the example paper.
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29986 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29987 Supported environments
29990 \begin_layout Standard
29992 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
29993 The A&A paper layout supports the following environments for structuring your text:
29996 \begin_layout Itemize
29998 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30004 \begin_layout Itemize
30006 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30012 \begin_layout Itemize
30014 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30020 \begin_layout Itemize
30022 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30028 \begin_layout Itemize
30030 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30036 \begin_layout Itemize
30038 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30044 \begin_layout Itemize
30046 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30052 \begin_layout Itemize
30054 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30060 \begin_layout Itemize
30062 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30068 \begin_layout Itemize
30070 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30076 \begin_layout Itemize
30078 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30084 \begin_layout Itemize
30086 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30095 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30096 Commands not supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30100 \begin_layout Standard
30102 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30103 Some commands are not yet supported by the
30107 layout for \SpecialChar LyX
30109 Some have already been mentioned.
30110 For the sake of completeness,
30111 they are listed all together here:
30114 \begin_layout Itemize
30116 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30124 \begin_layout Itemize
30126 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30134 \begin_layout Itemize
30136 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30144 \begin_layout Itemize
30146 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30154 \begin_layout Standard
30156 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30157 If you want to use any of these commands,
30158 you have to enter them yourself.
30161 Do not forget to mark them as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30167 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30168 Figure and Table Floats
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30173 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30175 provides support for the necessary float environments
30186 therefore we won't tell much about it here.
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30196 Just remember that tables should be left-aligned.
30198 select the table and change the alignment in
30200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30210 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30211 There is only one special thing:
30212 the figures with caption besides the figure.
30213 To create such a figure,
30214 you have to do the following:
30217 \begin_layout Enumerate
30219 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30220 Create a wide figure float:
30223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30224 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
30228 then right click in the figure and select
30231 \begin_inset space ~
30239 \begin_layout Enumerate
30241 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30242 Enter your caption text.
30245 \begin_layout Enumerate
30247 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30252 to move the cursor above the caption.
30255 \begin_layout Enumerate
30257 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30261 \begin_layout Enumerate
30263 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30264 Position the cursor behind the figure and insert a horizontal fill:
30267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30269 \begin_inset space ~
30272 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
30274 \begin_inset space ~
30282 \begin_layout Enumerate
30284 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30285 Switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30298 \begin_layout Enumerate
30300 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30310 Do not close the brace!
30313 \begin_layout Enumerate
30315 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30316 Position the cursor behind the caption text,
30317 switch to \SpecialChar LaTeX
30318 mode and insert the closing brace:
30322 \begin_inset space ~
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30336 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30338 refer to the figures in the example paper.
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30343 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30349 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30351 the paper has to be formated in a special double-spacing layout.
30353 you have to give the option
30357 to the document class.
30358 This must be done using the custom class options field in the
30360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30364 Just enter the string
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30373 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30377 \begin_layout Standard
30379 \change_deleted 564990737 1669742044
30384 directory contains an example paper written with \SpecialChar LyX
30386 It is the example paper from the original macro package,
30387 translated to \SpecialChar LyX
30389 Use it for inspiration,
30390 and compare the original \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 code with \SpecialChar LyX
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30397 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30401 \begin_layout Standard
30403 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30408 can be used to type letters according to German conventions.
30409 A template file is included in
30411 .../lyx/share/templates
30413 for you to use as a starting point.
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30418 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30424 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097429
30425 See the \SpecialChar LyX
30431 It contains all infos you need.
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30436 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30442 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30445 Panayotis Papasotiriou
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30450 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30456 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30457 The ijmpc package is a set of macros that facilitates electronic manuscript submission to the
30459 International Journal of Modern Physics C
30463 the ijmpd package is for creating manuscripts to be submitted to the
30465 International Journal of Modern Physics D
30468 Both journals are published by World Scientific.
30469 The corresponding document classes are named
30480 together with instructions for the authors,
30481 can be downloaded from the sites
30482 \begin_inset Flex URL
30485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30487 http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpc/mkt/guidelines.shtml
30493 \begin_inset Flex URL
30496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpd/mkt/guidelines.shtml
30504 Both packages are modified versions of the standard
30505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30513 and they are almost (but not exactly) identical.
30514 Most of their features are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30516 I have used \SpecialChar LyX
30517 successfully to write articles submitted to both journals without any problem.
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30522 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30528 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30530 the easiest way to write a paper is to start with a template.
30533 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
30550 This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common fields found in a manuscript.
30551 Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
30557 You should keep in mind the following remarks.
30560 \begin_layout Enumerate
30562 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30564 won't let you change the font size and the page style of the document,
30565 because such modifications are not allowed by both packages.
30568 \begin_layout Enumerate
30570 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30571 The language of the document should not be changed.
30572 Before previewing your paper,
30573 be sure that the babel package is not used.
30578 arg "dialog-show document"
30583 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30602 \begin_layout Enumerate
30604 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30613 style must be used to define keywords.
30616 \begin_layout Enumerate
30618 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30619 The ijmpc package provides a style named
30620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30623 Classification Codes
30624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30628 which can be used to define classification codes,
30629 such as PACS numbers.
30630 Note that this facility is not supported by the ijmpd package.
30633 \begin_layout Enumerate
30635 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30636 Several new environments are available:
30638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30763 Their use is more or less obvious.
30765 supports all these environments;
30766 it will use the proper label,
30768 and numbering scheme for each of them.
30771 \begin_layout Enumerate
30773 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30774 Both packages use basic citations;
30775 the natbib package should not be used.
30776 In \SpecialChar LyX
30778 citation references are shown as usual;
30780 citations are shown as superscripts.
30781 If you want to use a citation as normal text,
30788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30792 \begin_inset space \space{}
30796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30800 \begin_inset space \space{}
30810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30816 \begin_layout Enumerate
30818 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30827 section in both packages.
30828 To put acknowledgments,
30830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30840 \begin_layout Enumerate
30842 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30843 Appendices may be added to the paper,
30848 the Acknowledgments and
30854 provides a special environment,
30856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30863 which marks the beginning of the appendices.
30864 This environment should be left blank;
30865 it just sends a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30867 but nothing is really printed.
30868 In \SpecialChar LyX
30871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30878 is printed with blue letters,
30879 as a signal that all sections after that point are appendices.
30880 To write an appendix,
30882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30891 will number each appendix with capital letters,
30892 as required by both journals.
30894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30905 be present before the first appendix;
30907 all appendices will be numbered as normal sections in the output.
30910 \begin_layout Enumerate
30912 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30913 The ijmpc and the ijmpd packages use the
30917 command to implement table captions.
30919 a table created by \SpecialChar LyX
30920 is printed correctly,
30921 but its caption is ignored.
30923 you can use some \SpecialChar TeX
30924 code to overcome this problem,
30925 so that captions are printed as expected.
30927 create a float table as usual,
30928 remove the caption,
30929 and replace it with the \SpecialChar TeX
30941 you must also the \SpecialChar TeX
30946 immediately after the tabular material.
30947 Study the example table included in the template files to see how this trick is implemented.
30949 If you need table captions,
30950 you should implement the whole table float in a
30955 then include this file to the \SpecialChar LyX
30958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30959 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
30961 \begin_inset space ~
30967 Details on how to create a table float can be found in the files
30976 included in the corresponding packages.
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30981 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30982 Preparing a paper for submission
30985 \begin_layout Standard
30987 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
30988 Before you submit your paper you must export the \SpecialChar LyX
30989 document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30992 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
30993 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 Actually you have the choice between \SpecialChar LaTeX
31003 (plain) and pdflatex.
31004 If you intend to use pdflatex to prepare the paper,
31005 you should use the pdflatex option so that included graphics are converted to PDF format,
31006 ready for use by pdflatex.
31012 then make the following changes to the resulting
31019 \begin_layout Enumerate
31021 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31022 Remove the comment lines before the
31031 \begin_layout Enumerate
31033 \change_deleted 564990737 1669755802
31034 Remove everything between (and including) the
31047 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31051 \begin_layout Standard
31053 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
31058 file should be saved and processed through \SpecialChar LaTeX
31059 as many times as necessary.
31060 You may also want to check the resulting
31067 \begin_layout Standard
31069 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31073 \begin_layout Standard
31075 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31083 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31087 \begin_layout Standard
31089 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31090 The iopart package provides a document class to create electronic manuscript submission to the journals published by the Institute of Physics.
31091 Instructions for the authors how to create a paper using the iopart class can be downloaded together with the iopart package from the site
31092 \begin_inset Flex URL
31095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31097 ftp://ftp.iop.org/pub/journals/latex2e
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31107 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31113 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31114 The easiest way to write a paper is to start with the template
31118 that is available via
31120 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31123 The template explains how to use the special text environments.
31124 Here are the most important advices:
31127 \begin_layout Itemize
31129 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31130 To be able to compile your document to a PDF,
31133 ensure that the no AMS packages are loaded in
31135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31142 \begin_layout Itemize
31144 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31147 The title environment defines the kind of your paper.
31148 So use one of the following environments for the title:
31152 \begin_layout Itemize
31154 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31163 \begin_layout Itemize
31165 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31174 \begin_layout Itemize
31176 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31182 for a Topical review
31185 \begin_layout Itemize
31187 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31196 \begin_layout Itemize
31198 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31207 \begin_layout Itemize
31209 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31215 for a Paper (same as Title)
31218 \begin_layout Itemize
31220 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31226 for a Preliminary communication
31229 \begin_layout Itemize
31231 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31237 for a Rapid communication
31240 \begin_layout Itemize
31242 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31248 for a Letter to the editor
31252 \begin_layout Itemize
31254 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31257 All title environments except of
31261 can have an optional short title.
31264 \begin_layout Itemize
31266 \change_deleted 564990737 1669801478
31267 There is a general title environment
31271 which is not directly supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31273 This can be used as \SpecialChar TeX
31274 code when your document doesn't fit into one of the other title types.
31277 \begin_layout Standard
31279 \change_deleted 564990737 1672743015
31280 For more informations like hints for special table and formula formatting,
31281 look at the IOP author guidelines.
31284 \begin_layout Standard
31286 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31290 \begin_layout Standard
31292 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31295 Panayotis Papasotiriou
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31300 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31306 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31307 The Kluwer package is a set of macros produced by Kluwer Academic Publishers that facilitates electronic manuscript submission to the journals they publish.
31308 Most known of them (at least in my domain of interest) are
31310 Astrophysics and Space Science
31317 but there are many others (see a complete list at
31318 \begin_inset Flex URL
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31323 http://www.wkap.nl/jrnllist.htm/JRNLHOME
31329 The Kluwer package may be downloaded from the site
31330 \begin_inset Flex URL
31333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 http://www.wkap.nl/kaphtml.htm/STYLEFILES
31341 A complete user guide is contained in that package (but it can also be downloaded separately).
31344 \begin_layout Standard
31346 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31348 supports many features of the package but not everything.
31350 the \SpecialChar TeX
31351 code needed is reduced to some
31352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31359 commands of the package (see
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31366 reference "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
31372 I have recently used \SpecialChar LyX
31373 to write an article submitted to the
31375 Astrophysics and Space Science
31377 without any problem.
31380 \begin_layout Standard
31382 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31386 \begin_layout Standard
31388 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31389 The easiest way to write a paper is to start with the Kluwer template file.
31392 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31405 This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common fields found in a manuscript and a short description of their use.
31406 As in most templates,
31407 simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
31412 ) with the correct information.
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31417 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31418 Preparing a paper for submission
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31423 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31424 As in the AAS\SpecialChar TeX
31426 before you submit your paper to a journal you must
31427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31437 \begin_layout Enumerate
31439 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31440 Export your paper as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31445 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
31446 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
31454 \begin_layout Enumerate
31456 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31461 file with a text editor and make the following changes
31465 \begin_layout Enumerate
31467 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31468 remove the comment lines before the
31477 \begin_layout Enumerate
31479 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31480 remove everything between (and including) the
31493 except for any commands you specifically put into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31497 \begin_layout Standard
31499 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31508 \begin_layout Enumerate
31510 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31515 file through \SpecialChar LaTeX
31516 as many times as necessary (usually up to three).
31519 \begin_layout Enumerate
31521 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31532 \begin_inset space \space{}
31540 and check if everything is OK (it should,
31541 if you didn't make any mistake).
31544 \begin_layout Standard
31546 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31554 of the Kluwer package
31555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31557 name "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
31564 \begin_layout Standard
31566 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31567 The Kluwer package has the following
31568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31578 \begin_layout Enumerate
31580 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31581 It is possible to write multiple articles in the same \SpecialChar LaTeX
31586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31587 I can't imagine any good reason to do this.
31593 Each article must be included in the environment
31594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31603 this environment cannot be omitted,
31604 even if you write just one article.
31606 each article starts with the command
31614 ends with the command
31621 Although this can be implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
31623 I didn't included it,
31624 since it looks ugly and can confuse the novice user.
31626 you need to enter them directly and mark them as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31627 code (the well-known
31628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31639 \begin_layout Enumerate
31641 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31642 Information given at the beginning of the article (i.
31643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31647 \begin_inset space \space{}
31656 abstract and keywords) must be included in an environment called
31657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 This is not implemented in \SpecialChar LyX
31667 so you must enter title,
31669 \begin_inset space ~
31672 between two \SpecialChar TeX
31688 \begin_layout Enumerate
31690 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31691 According to the user manual,
31692 the label of each bibliography item must be written as
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31717 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31722 template takes care of all these
31723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31731 If you start a new paper using this template you don't need to do anything special.
31735 \begin_layout Enumerate
31737 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31738 don't delete the \SpecialChar TeX
31739 code included in the template,
31743 \begin_layout Enumerate
31745 \change_deleted 564990737 1670317155
31746 copy the example bibliography item included in the template and modify it as necessary to enter new bibliography items.
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31751 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31757 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31762 provides an alternative to the standard
31767 It provides similar functionality,
31768 but you might prefer this layout with sans serif sections,
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31775 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31776 Springer Journals (
31783 \begin_layout Standard
31785 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31793 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31797 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31800 These are the layout files for some of the journal formats used by Springer Verlag and listed on
31801 \begin_inset Flex URL
31804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 http://www.springer.de/author/tex/help-journals.html
31812 where you should also go to fetch the class files (yes,
31813 these are \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
31815 It is a modular system:
31816 the things common to all journals are implemented in
31821 which journal-specific layout files (such as,
31823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31827 \begin_inset space \space{}
31834 for Journal of Geodesy) can include.
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31839 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31840 This means that implementing support for any other Springer journal on this list is as simple as writing your own
31848 file following the outline given in
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31858 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31859 It is reasonably well tested only for the Journal of Geodesy.
31868 come with the standard \SpecialChar LyX
31870 Install the relevant class file (downloaded from Springer) in a proper directory,
31871 reconfigure \SpecialChar LaTeX
31872 (in the te\SpecialChar TeX
31878 as root if necessary —
31879 doesn't \SpecialChar LyX
31880 take care of this?),
31881 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
31882 and it should work.
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31887 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31891 \begin_layout Standard
31893 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31894 A large number of theorem-like styles —
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31911 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31917 Running_\SpecialChar LaTeX
31928 See the Springer class file documentation for details.
31931 \begin_layout Standard
31933 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31937 \begin_layout Itemize
31939 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31953 \begin_layout Itemize
31955 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31958 Probability Theory and Related Fields
31966 Jean-Marc Lasgouttes
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31971 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31976 \begin_layout Standard
31978 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31984 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
31985 These files are partly based on the older
31990 which was again based on a tinkered-with version of an old \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 2.09 style file from Springer.
31999 Jean-Marc Lasgouttes helped out big in making me find my way around the \SpecialChar LyX
32000 layout file mechanism.
32003 \begin_layout Standard
32005 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32009 \begin_layout Standard
32011 \change_deleted 564990737 1671097446
32013 But probably less than in the old hacked-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32021 \begin_layout Chapter
32023 Features needing Extra Software
32026 \begin_layout Section
32027 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32037 \begin_layout Subsection
32041 \begin_layout Standard
32050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32055 is not yet available when you are using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32056 distribution MiK\SpecialChar TeX
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32082 \begin_inset Newline newline
32086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32088 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/chktex.html"
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32099 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32102 package is a program that was written by
32103 \begin_inset Flex Noun
32106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32108 \begin_inset space ~
32116 in frustration because some constructs in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32117 are sometimes non-intuitive,
32118 and easy to forget.
32119 The program runs over your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32121 checks the integrity of the file,
32122 and flags some common errors.
32123 In other technical words,
32128 for \SpecialChar LaTeX
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32134 what is a syntax checker doing in \SpecialChar LyX
32135 which is supposed to produce correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
32137 The answer is simple:
32142 not only checks the
32151 checks for type-errors,
32154 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32157 catches some common
32162 in addition to the syntactical ones.
32166 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32169 is capable of detecting several common errors,
32173 \begin_layout Itemize
32174 Ellipsis detection:
32175 \begin_inset Newline newline
32178 Use \SpecialChar ldots
32182 \begin_layout Itemize
32183 No space in front of/after parenthesis:
32184 \begin_inset Newline newline
32190 \begin_layout Itemize
32191 Enforcement of normal space after common abbreviations:
32192 \begin_inset Newline newline
32196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32200 \begin_inset space \space{}
32203 is too wide spacing.
32206 \begin_layout Itemize
32207 Enforcement of end-of-sentence space when the last sentence ends with a capital letter:
32208 \begin_inset Newline newline
32212 And this is wrong spacing.
32215 \begin_layout Itemize
32216 Space in front of labels and similar commands:
32217 \begin_inset Newline newline
32220 The label should stick right up to the text to avoid falling to a wrong page.
32222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32233 This footnote is in danger of falling off to a wrong page
32238 The label is separated too much.
32241 \begin_layout Itemize
32242 Space in front of references,
32243 instead of hard spaces:
32244 \begin_inset Newline newline
32247 If you have bad luck,
32248 the text will break right between the referenced text and reference number,
32251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32253 reference "sec:chktex"
32261 \begin_layout Itemize
32263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32271 \begin_inset Formula $\times$
32275 \begin_inset Newline newline
32278 2x2 looks cheap compared to
32279 \begin_inset Formula $2\times2$
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 and more \SpecialChar ldots
32287 It is an invaluable tool when you are
32288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32295 your document before printing,
32296 and you should run it right after the obligatory spelling check,
32297 and before you go fine tuning the typesetting.
32300 \begin_layout Subsection
32304 \begin_layout Standard
32305 If you have the program installed,
32306 usage is as simple as choosing
32308 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32316 This will make \SpecialChar LyX
32317 generate a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32318 file of your document,
32321 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32325 and then make \SpecialChar LyX
32327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32334 with the warnings from
32336 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32341 The warnings will be placed close to the point of the mistake,
32342 and you can quickly find them by using the
32344 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
32348 or the shortcut key
32357 Open the error boxes by clicking on them with the mouse,
32358 or use the shortcut key
32367 or the corresponding
32376 Read the warning and correct the mistake,
32377 if it is a mistake.
32378 If you have trouble understanding what the warning is about,
32379 you can safely ignore it.
32380 Remember that there is a hidden layer between the document on screen and the technical details in invoking
32382 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32386 and this gap can make some warnings seem arcane or just plain silly.
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32390 This document is an excellent testing bed for the feature,
32391 and it should provide quite a few warnings for you to fiddle with.
32392 Since computers are only so smart,
32393 expect most of the warnings to be false alarms,
32397 \begin_layout Subsection
32398 How to fine tune it
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32405 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32408 makes more noise than suits your mood.
32409 Then you can choose not to use it,
32410 wait until your mood changes,
32411 or try to customize
32413 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32416 to get better along with you.
32419 \begin_layout Standard
32422 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32429 very configurable and extensible,
32430 you should not expect to solve all problems with
32432 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32435 in \SpecialChar LyX
32437 Since \SpecialChar LyX
32438 has to generate a somewhat special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32439 file to be able to match the line numbers from the
32441 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32449 You can inspect the specific output from
32455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32458 \begin_inset space ~
32472 to the internal document structure,
32473 some of the warnings will not appear correctly.
32474 There are two things you can do about this:
32477 \begin_layout Itemize
32480 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32483 invocation command line in
32484 \begin_inset Flex Noun
32487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32489 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32490 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32491 LaTeX\SpecialChar menuseparator
32500 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
32503 installation configuration file (usually with the file
32508 See below to learn what warnings can be enabled and disabled on the command line.
32511 \begin_layout Itemize
32512 Export your document as a raw \SpecialChar LaTeX
32515 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
32516 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
32525 Invoked in this way,
32526 it can be a hassle to find the corresponding place in the document inside \SpecialChar LyX
32528 but with a little patience,
32529 you should be able to do it.
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 Here follows the warning messages that can be enabled and disabled in
32542 to disable a warning,
32547 to enable a warning.
32548 The emphasized entries are disabled by default,
32549 because the default is "
32551 chktex -n1 -n3 -n6 -n9 -n22 -n25 -n30 -n38
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 Notice that you should only use the options that enable and disable warnings,
32558 because \SpecialChar LyX
32559 relies on some of the other command line parameters to be set in a specific way to have a chance to communicate with
32566 \begin_layout Enumerate
32570 Command terminated with space.
32573 \begin_layout Enumerate
32576 Non-breaking space (
32577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32588 ) should have been used.
32591 \begin_layout Enumerate
32595 You should enclose the previous parenthesis with
32596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32610 \begin_layout Enumerate
32613 Italic correction (
32614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32627 ) found in non-italic buffer.
32630 \begin_layout Enumerate
32633 Italic correction (
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32647 ) found more than once.
32650 \begin_layout Enumerate
32654 No italic correction (
32655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32671 \begin_layout Enumerate
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32701 \begin_layout Enumerate
32704 Wrong length of dash may have been used.
32707 \begin_layout Enumerate
32711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32738 \begin_layout Enumerate
32742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32756 \begin_layout Enumerate
32760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32771 to achieve an ellipsis.
32774 \begin_layout Enumerate
32777 Inter-word spacing (
32778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32791 ) should perhaps be used.
32794 \begin_layout Enumerate
32797 Inter-sentence spacing (
32798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32811 ) should perhaps be used.
32814 \begin_layout Enumerate
32817 Could not find argument for command.
32820 \begin_layout Enumerate
32824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32838 \begin_layout Enumerate
32841 Math mode still on at end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32845 \begin_layout Enumerate
32849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32860 doesn't match the number of
32861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32875 \begin_layout Enumerate
32878 You should use either
32881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32894 as an alternative to
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32909 \begin_layout Enumerate
32916 " (ASCII 39) instead of "
32923 \begin_layout Enumerate
32926 User-specified pattern found.
32929 \begin_layout Enumerate
32932 This command might not be intended.
32935 \begin_layout Enumerate
32942 \begin_layout Enumerate
32960 \begin_layout Enumerate
32963 Delete this space to maintain correct page references.
32966 \begin_layout Enumerate
32970 You might wish to put this between a pair of
32971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32985 \begin_layout Enumerate
32988 You ought to remove spaces in front of punctuation.
32991 \begin_layout Enumerate
32994 Could not execute \SpecialChar LaTeX
32998 \begin_layout Enumerate
33007 in front of small punctuation.
33010 \begin_layout Enumerate
33018 may look prettier here.
33021 \begin_layout Enumerate
33025 Multiple spaces detected in output.
33028 \begin_layout Enumerate
33031 This text may be ignored.
33034 \begin_layout Enumerate
33040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33045 to begin quotation,
33053 \begin_layout Enumerate
33064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33072 \begin_layout Enumerate
33078 \begin_layout Enumerate
33081 You should perhaps use
33082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33096 \begin_layout Enumerate
33099 You should put a space in front of/after parenthesis.
33102 \begin_layout Enumerate
33105 You should avoid spaces in front of/after parenthesis.
33108 \begin_layout Enumerate
33112 You should not use punctuation in front of/after quotes.
33115 \begin_layout Enumerate
33118 Double space found.
33121 \begin_layout Enumerate
33124 You should put punctuation outside inner/inside display math mode.
33127 \begin_layout Enumerate
33130 You ought to not use primitive \SpecialChar TeX
33131 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
33135 \begin_layout Enumerate
33138 You should remove spaces in front of
33139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33153 \begin_layout Enumerate
33156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33167 is normally not followed by
33168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33182 \begin_layout Standard
33183 In later versions of \SpecialChar LyX
33185 we hope to provide a more complete interface to this tool (and it's smaller cousin
33189 ) to exploit the full power of it.
33190 But it's not exactly useless as it is now:
33191 go try it on one of your existing documents of a certain length and be surprised.
33194 \begin_layout Section
33195 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33202 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
33209 \begin_layout Subsection
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33215 supports some of the most basic RCS/CVS/SVN/GIT commands.
33216 If you need something a bit more sophisticated you will have to do that manually in a terminal.
33219 \begin_layout Standard
33220 Also note that CVS support is not as good as subversion support,
33221 so we advise using SVN instead.
33222 A good place to start learning Subversion is the SVN Book
33226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33229 target "http://svnbook.red-bean.com/"
33240 In the case of RCS you should read
33241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33254 This file describes all the basic features of RCS.
33255 You should especially notice the comment about a RCS directory,
33256 and the notion of a master RCS file (the file ending in
33263 \begin_layout Standard
33264 Before you begin to use the version control features in \SpecialChar LyX
33266 you should be familiar with RCS/CVS/SVN/GIT usage.
33267 The implementation in \SpecialChar LyX
33268 assumes a recent version of the GNU RCS or CVS/SVN package —
33269 no guarantees are made for older versions.
33270 Most of the log messages are not currently displayed after operations —
33271 you can check them in the Messages pane if you are unsure.
33272 Regular users of version control will appreciate the VC toolbar,
33273 which can be enabled via
33275 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
33276 Toolbars\SpecialChar menuseparator
33278 \begin_inset space ~
33286 \begin_layout Standard
33287 For introducing your own external commands consult
33288 \begin_inset Flex Code
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33305 \begin_layout Standard
33306 It is strongly recommended to store documents in uncompressed format if using version control (uncheck
33308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33312 Uncompressed LyX documents are text files and therefore for merging two different versions by version control systems.
33313 Compressed LyX documents are binary files,
33314 which cannot be merged by version control systems.
33317 \begin_layout Subsection
33318 RCS commands in \SpecialChar LyX
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33323 The following sections describe the RCS commands supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33325 You can find them in the
33327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33329 \begin_inset space ~
33336 was tested against RCS 5.7/5.8.
33339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33345 \begin_layout Standard
33346 If your document is not under revision control,
33347 this is the only item shown in the menu.
33348 And if it is under revision control,
33353 item is not visible.
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 This command registers your document with RCS (unless you are under the directory managed by CVS)\SpecialChar endofsentence
33359 You are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
33360 The document is now set in Read-Only mode and you have to
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33367 \begin_inset space ~
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33377 before making any changes to it.
33378 A document under revision control has a
33379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33382 [RCS:<version> <locker>]
33383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33386 item tagged to the filename in the minibuffer.
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33390 RCS command that is run:
33393 \begin_layout LyX-Code
33396 ci -q -u -i -t-"<initial description>" <file-name>
33399 \begin_layout Standard
33404 to understand the switches.
33408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 When you are finished editing a file,
33416 you check in your changes.
33418 you are asked for a description of the changes.
33419 This is stored in the history log.
33420 The version number is bumped,
33421 your changes are applied to the master RCS file,
33422 the document is unlocked and set to Read-Only mode.
33425 \begin_layout Itemize
33429 ci -q -u -m"<description>" <file-name>
33432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33438 \begin_layout Standard
33439 By doing this you lock the document so that only you can edit it.
33440 This will also make the document Read-Write only for you.
33441 You will usually continue editing for a while and when you are finished you check in your changes.
33442 The status line is changed to reflect that you have locked the file.
33445 \begin_layout Itemize
33449 co -q -l <file-name>
33452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33455 Revert To Repository Version
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
33460 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
33463 \begin_layout Itemize
33467 co -f -u<version> <file-name>
33470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33476 \begin_layout Standard
33477 This will create a copy of the current document.
33478 Since RCS does not support copy operations natively,
33479 the version history is not preserved,
33480 and the copy is added as a new file.
33481 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
33482 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
33483 After that the copy is created,
33484 both locally and in the repository.
33485 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
33486 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
33488 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33494 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
33497 \begin_layout Labeling
33498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33500 \begin_inset space ~
33505 \begin_inset space ~
33509 \begin_inset Newline newline
33513 \begin_inset Flex Code
33516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33519 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33523 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33532 \begin_inset Flex Code
33535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33542 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33551 \begin_inset Newline newline
33555 \begin_inset Flex Code
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33562 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33566 \begin_inset Quotes qld
33577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33583 \begin_layout Standard
33584 This makes as if the last check in never happened.
33585 No changes are made to the document loaded into \SpecialChar LyX
33587 but the last version is removed from the master RCS file.
33590 \begin_layout Itemize
33594 rcs -o<version> <file-name>
33597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 This shows the complete history of the RCS document.
33609 is shown in a browser.
33617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33621 \begin_layout Standard
33623 supports RCS version number,
33625 date and time of last commit.
33626 All those are extracted from
33628 rlog -r <file-name>
33632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33634 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
33642 \begin_layout Subsection
33643 CVS commands in \SpecialChar LyX
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33648 A subset of CVS operations is supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33650 You can find the commands in the
33652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 \begin_inset space ~
33660 The version control system SVN is more powerful,
33661 so please use it instead of CVS if possible.
33664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33670 \begin_layout Standard
33671 If you start from scratch with CVS you have to create your repository and checkout the working copy with external tools.
33672 If you're using a client-server setup you may need to login before doing the first repository checkout.
33675 \begin_layout Standard
33676 If your documents are under revision control and others are using the same repository problems arise when different changes to the same document at the same location happen.
33677 Standard CVS repositories don't operate with a file locking mechanism.
33678 This may be surprising,
33679 but conflicts only occur if people disagree on the proper content of the same part of a document.
33681 if co-workers are used to communicate regularly,
33682 these conflicts occur rarely.
33683 If they don't communicate they have a fundamental problem anyway.
33684 Nevertheless some people like to work with so called
33685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33693 If they do so the working copy of all files is readonly when checked out first and the user starts editing after using a special command to make the working copy writable.
33694 When the changes are checked in the working copy returns to readonly state.
33695 With \SpecialChar LyX
33696 one has to edit the
33697 \begin_inset Flex Code
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 file and add the line
33707 \begin_inset Flex Code
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 to work with reserved checkouts.
33717 The benefit is the possibility to see who is using a writable copy of some document.
33718 It's not guaranteed only one user makes a copy writable.
33721 \begin_layout Standard
33723 tries to guess if you're using reserved or non-reserved checkouts.
33724 If your working copy is readonly or it is writable and an additional copy of your document exists in the CVS/Base sub-directory a reserved otherwise a non-reserved checkout is assumed.
33725 When a reserved checkout is detected you have to use
33726 \begin_inset Flex Noun
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 to make your working copy writable if it's readonly.
33737 \begin_inset Flex Noun
33740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33746 operation is possible and that makes your working copy readonly again after transferring your changes to the repository.
33749 \begin_layout Standard
33750 More information about CVS can be found here
33751 \begin_inset Flex URL
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33756 http://www.nongnu.org/cvs
33762 \begin_inset Flex URL
33765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 http://ximbiot.com/cvs
33775 \begin_layout Standard
33780 to understand the sub-commands and the switches mentioned below.
33783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33789 \begin_layout Standard
33790 If your document is not under revision control,
33791 this is the only item shown in the menu.
33792 And if it is under revision control,
33797 item is not visible.
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33802 This command registers in CVS your document
33803 \begin_inset Flex Strong
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 in the case you have already the documents directory under CVS control (in particular
33819 This means you have to create or checkout the archive by yourself using external tools.
33820 (In case you forget that step \SpecialChar LyX
33821 registers the document with RCS.)
33824 \begin_layout Standard
33825 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
33826 Don't forget that registered file is not yet checked in.
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 CVS command that is run:
33833 cvs -q add -m"<entered message>" "<file-name>"
33836 \begin_layout Standard
33841 above and for all other CVS commands is an abbreviation for
33842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33845 change the current working directory to file location and use the file name without path component as argument
33846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33858 \begin_layout Standard
33859 When you are finished editing a file,
33860 you commit your changes.
33861 When you do this and you had changed the document,
33862 you are asked for a description of the changes.
33863 After that changes are written to the repository.
33864 In case you didn't change the document and a reserved checkout is detected the reservation made on
33865 \begin_inset Flex Noun
33868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 \begin_layout Labeling
33878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33880 \begin_inset space ~
33885 \begin_inset space ~
33889 \begin_inset Newline newline
33893 \begin_inset Flex Code
33896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33899 -q commit -m"<description>" "<file-name>"
33905 \begin_inset Newline newline
33909 \begin_inset Flex Code
33912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33929 \begin_layout Standard
33930 When you are sharing a repository with others,
33931 you may have to incorporate their changes into your working copy.
33934 \begin_layout Standard
33938 cvs -q update "<file-name>"
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 If a readonly checkout is detected the working copy is made writable and reserved.
33945 \begin_layout Standard
33949 cvs -q edit "<file-name>"
33952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33955 Revert To Repository Version
33958 \begin_layout Standard
33959 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
33960 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
33961 Firstly the file is deleted,
33962 secondly CVS update command is run.
33965 \begin_layout Standard
33969 cvs -q update "<file-name>"
33972 \begin_layout Standard
33973 If a reserved checkout is detected and the working copy has no changes only the reservation is undone.
33976 \begin_layout Standard
33980 cvs -q unedit "<file-name>"
33983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33989 \begin_layout Standard
33990 This will create a copy of the current document.
33991 Since CVS does not support copy operations natively,
33992 the version history is not preserved,
33993 and the copy is added as a new file.
33994 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
33995 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
33996 After that the copy is created,
33997 both locally and in the repository.
33998 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
33999 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
34001 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34007 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
34010 \begin_layout Labeling
34011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34018 \begin_inset space ~
34022 \begin_inset Newline newline
34026 \begin_inset Flex Code
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 \begin_inset Flex Code
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 \begin_inset Newline newline
34050 \begin_inset Flex Code
34053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34054 cvs -q add "<new-file-name>"
34062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34068 \begin_layout Standard
34069 This will rename the current document.
34070 Since CVS does not support rename operations natively,
34071 the version history is not preserved,
34072 the renamed document is added as a new file,
34073 and the original document is deleted.
34074 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
34075 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
34076 After that the document is renamed,
34077 both locally and in the repository.
34078 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
34079 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
34081 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34087 the document is reloaded using the new name.
34090 \begin_layout Labeling
34091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34098 \begin_inset space ~
34102 \begin_inset Newline newline
34106 \begin_inset Flex Code
34109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34116 \begin_inset Flex Code
34119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34126 \begin_inset Newline newline
34130 \begin_inset Flex Code
34133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34134 cvs -q add "<new-file-name>"
34140 \begin_inset Newline newline
34144 \begin_inset Flex Code
34147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34148 cvs -q remove "<file-name>"
34156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34157 Update of the local directory checkout from repository
34160 \begin_layout Standard
34161 Once your documents gets more complex,
34162 containing sub-documents and pictures,
34164 \begin_inset Flex Code
34167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 files and so on using version control becomes more complicated.
34175 supports updating the whole tree in which resides the document.
34176 This become especially useful once you cooperate with people which neither have detailed knowledge about CVS usage nor they have ambition to commit additional material to the repository.
34177 You have to organize the files structure so that all external files are in the same directory or subdirectories of the document.
34178 It's good practice anyway to store multipart documents in an extra directory.
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34183 \begin_inset Flex Code
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34187 Update local directory from repository
34192 command updates the whole directory.
34193 If local changes are detected user is warned before update starts.
34194 In case of merge conflicts both versions of the conflicting document parts are placed in the final document.
34195 You have to review and correct the result of the merge.
34196 You'll find the conflicts enclosed in pairs of
34197 \begin_inset Flex Code
34200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34207 \begin_inset Flex Code
34210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34217 \begin_inset Flex Code
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 The first part is your version as before the update operation with the document name prepended.
34228 The second one is the repository version with the version number after the sequence of
34229 \begin_inset Flex Code
34232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34241 \begin_layout Labeling
34242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34253 \begin_inset Newline newline
34257 \begin_inset Flex Code
34260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34269 (Ask if changes are detected.)
34270 \begin_inset Newline newline
34274 \begin_inset Flex Code
34277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34291 \begin_inset Flex Code
34294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34300 stands for the path to the document.
34303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34310 This shows the complete history of the CVS document.
34313 cvs log "<file-name>"
34315 is shown in a browser.
34318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34324 supports CVS version number,
34326 date and time of last commit.
34327 All those are extracted from
34329 cvs log -r <file-name>
34333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34335 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
34343 \begin_layout Subsection
34344 SVN commands in \SpecialChar LyX
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 SVN is now partially supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34351 You can find the commands in the
34353 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34355 \begin_inset space ~
34361 Please note that if you use password protected access to repository via ssh,
34362 you will be asked in terminal window.
34364 was tested against SVN 1.5,
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34371 Most of the commands will work with 1.4 too,
34373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34375 reference "subsec:SVN-Repo-Update"
34381 There seems to be currently unresolved permissions problem under SVN 1.8 with reverting changes when file is locked.
34389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 If your document is not under revision control,
34397 this is the only item shown in the menu.
34398 And if it is under revision control,
34403 item is not visible.
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34407 This command registers in SVN your document ONLY in case you have already the documents directory under SVN control (in particular
34412 This means you have to checkout the archive by yourself.
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34416 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
34417 Don't forget that registered file is not yet commited.
34420 \begin_layout Standard
34421 SVN command that is run:
34425 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34429 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34440 to understand the switches.
34443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 When you are finished editing a file,
34451 you commit your changes.
34453 you are asked for a description of the changes.
34454 After that changes are commited.
34457 \begin_layout Standard
34462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 In case locking is not enabled.
34465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34467 reference "subsec:SVN-File-Locking"
34479 svn commit -q -m"<description>" <file-name>
34482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 Updates the changes of this file from the repository.
34490 Be sure you understand SVN merging and conflicts resolving before using this function,
34491 because all conflicts has to be resolved manually by you!
34494 \begin_layout Standard
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 svn update --non-interactive
34508 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34512 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34521 Revert To Repository Version
34524 \begin_layout Standard
34525 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
34526 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34534 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34538 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34550 \begin_layout Standard
34551 This will create a copy of the current document including the version history.
34552 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
34553 You are asked for a file name and a description of the copy operation.
34554 After that the copy is created,
34555 both locally and in the repository.
34556 If the parent directories of the copied and original document differ,
34557 all relative paths of included files of the copy are adjusted (like in
34559 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34565 the copy is loaded instead of the original document.
34568 \begin_layout Labeling
34569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34576 \begin_inset space ~
34580 \begin_inset Newline newline
34584 \begin_inset Flex Code
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34595 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34599 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34603 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34612 \begin_inset Newline newline
34616 \begin_inset Flex Code
34619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34635 This will rename the current document including the version history.
34636 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
34637 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
34638 After that the document is renamed,
34639 both locally and in the repository.
34640 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
34641 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
34643 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
34649 the document is reloaded using the new name.
34652 \begin_layout Labeling
34653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34655 \begin_inset space ~
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_inset Newline newline
34668 \begin_inset Flex Code
34671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34679 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34683 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34687 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34696 \begin_inset Newline newline
34700 \begin_inset Flex Code
34703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34715 name "subsec:SVN-Repo-Update"
34719 Update of the local directory checkout from repository
34723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34724 Note that this command will work only with subversion
34725 \begin_inset Formula $\geqq1.5$
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34737 All the commands above have one shortcoming – they deal with the current document only.
34738 Once your document contains pictures,
34740 \begin_inset Flex Code
34743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34749 files and so on administration becomes more complicated.
34751 now supports updating the whole tree in which resides the document
34755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 One need to organize the files structure so that all external files are in the same directory or subdirectories of the document.
34763 This become especially useful once you cooperate with people which neither know about subversion management nor they have ambition to commit additional material to the repository.
34767 \begin_layout Standard
34768 \begin_inset Flex Code
34771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34772 Update local directory from repository
34777 command updates the whole directory and in case of merge conflicts local version of the files are left,
34778 so no unintended data loss occurs.
34779 If local changes are detected user is warned before update starts.
34782 \begin_layout Labeling
34783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34785 \begin_inset space ~
34790 \begin_inset space ~
34794 \begin_inset Newline newline
34798 \begin_inset Flex Code
34801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34807 (Ask if changes are detected.)
34808 \begin_inset Newline newline
34812 \begin_inset Flex Code
34815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34816 svn update --accept mine-full $path
34824 \begin_layout Standard
34826 \begin_inset Flex Code
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 stands for the path to the document.
34838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 This shows the complete history of the SVN document.
34849 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34853 \begin_inset Quotes qld
34858 is shown in a browser.
34861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34865 name "subsec:SVN-File-Locking"
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34873 The file exchange through various revision control systems brings the problem of merge conflicts in case two different users try to edit the same (parts of) document.
34874 When such a conflict happens it needs manual resolving and one reasonable alternative is to provide some kind of locking mechanism,
34875 which guarantees that only one user is allowed to edit file at the given time.
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 SVN has two such mechanisms to provide mutual exclusivity for file access – locks and automatic setting of write permissions (see sec.
34881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34883 reference "subsec:Automatical-Locking-Property"
34889 \begin_inset Flex Code
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34903 \begin_inset Flex URL
34906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34908 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.2/svn.advanced.locking.html
34919 If this property is detected for a given document \SpecialChar LyX
34920 starts to use SVN locks for document editing automatically and the whole check-in/out mechanism switches to the same regimen as for RCS.
34921 This in particular means there are two different modes of file use in \SpecialChar LyX
34925 \begin_layout Itemize
34927 The loaded file is in the read-only mode.
34928 For editing on needs to check-out.
34933 consists of updating from the repository and gaining write lock.
34934 If the lock is not possible to obtain,
34935 we remain in unlocked state.
34938 \begin_layout Itemize
34940 The loaded file is in the
34941 \begin_inset Quotes els
34945 \begin_inset Quotes ers
34949 No other user is allowed to edit the file.
34954 consists of commiting changes and releasing write-lock.
34955 If no changes have been made to the document,
34956 no commit will be produced
34960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34961 Don't be puzzled by the fact that you will be asked for commit message anyway.
34966 and only the write-lock will be released.
34969 \begin_layout Standard
34973 \begin_layout Labeling
34974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34978 svn commit -q -m"<description>" "<file-name>"
34979 \begin_inset Newline newline
34982 svn unlock "<file-name>"
34985 \begin_layout Labeling
34986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34990 svn update "<file-name>"
34991 \begin_inset Newline newline
34994 svn lock "<file-name>"
34997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35002 name "subsec:Automatical-Locking-Property"
35008 Automatic Locking Property
35011 \begin_layout Standard
35012 The above mentioned automatic setting of write permissions of the .lyx file can be set through
35014 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35019 Control\SpecialChar menuseparator
35020 Use Locking Property
35023 This command is active only when the file is not locked on the svn server (i.e.
35024 you need to check-out before proceeding).
35027 \begin_layout Labeling
35028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_layout Labeling
35037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35041 svn propset svn:needs-lock ON "<file-name>"
35044 \begin_layout Labeling
35045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35049 svn propdel svn:needs-lock "<file-name>"
35052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35055 name "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
35059 Revision Information in Documents
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 There are more possibilities how to activate revision information in our document.
35066 \begin_layout Itemize
35072 \begin_layout Itemize
35073 tree revision information (
35074 \begin_inset Flex Code
35077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35084 The result is the output of the
35085 \begin_inset Flex Code
35088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35095 the following table gives you an idea,
35096 how to read the results.
35099 \begin_layout Standard
35101 \begin_inset Tabular
35102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="6" columns="2">
35103 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35144 mixed revision working copy
35151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35164 modified working copy
35171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35184 switched working copy
35191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35204 partial working copy,
35205 from a sparse checkout
35212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35227 switched working copy
35240 \begin_layout Itemize
35241 file revision information.
35242 The result comes from parsing the output of
35243 \begin_inset Flex Code
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35252 \begin_inset space ~
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35265 Supported flags are:
35269 \begin_layout Itemize
35270 version number of the last commit (
35271 \begin_inset Flex Code
35274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35283 \begin_layout Itemize
35284 author of the last commit (
35285 \begin_inset Flex Code
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35297 \begin_layout Itemize
35298 date of the last commit (
35299 \begin_inset Flex Code
35302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35311 \begin_layout Itemize
35312 time of the last commit (
35313 \begin_inset Flex Code
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35327 You can obtain this info via InsetInfo (
35328 \change_inserted 5863208 1564400022
35329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35330 Field\SpecialChar menuseparator
35331 Version Control Revision
35332 \change_deleted 5863208 1564399852
35335 \begin_inset Flex Code
35338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 info-insert buffer vcs-date
35347 The information will be available only when you have the file stored under svn managment (i.e.
35349 \begin_inset Flex Code
35352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35358 directory is available with your document).
35362 \begin_layout Itemize
35365 possibility is to use svn keywords
35369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35370 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.special.keywords.html
35376 In short – you set file keywords property (e.g.
35379 svn propset svn:keywords 'Rev' file.lyx
35381 ) and then paste keyword \SpecialChar TeX
35386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35387 This is an easy way how to ensure that \SpecialChar LyX
35388 won't break the line in the middle of keyword tag.
35393 tag in your document (e.g.
35395 \begin_inset Flex Code
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35405 This way svn client will automatically substitute revision number (e.g.
35407 \begin_inset Flex Code
35410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35417 ) after each update and commit.
35418 There are more problems with this approach.
35420 the '$' character is used in \SpecialChar TeX
35421 world for math equations,
35422 so any occurence of math formula
35423 \begin_inset Formula $Rev$
35427 \begin_inset Formula $Rev:59$
35430 in your \SpecialChar LyX
35432 Similarly for other keywords like Id,
35436 Secondly svn output is dependent on your locales,
35437 so its very easy that svn would produce some problematic strings once Date is used.
35438 Thirdly you get the whole 'Rev:
35439 59' string in your document instead of the plain number.
35440 Until subversion implements user's custom keywords it will be hard to use this approach reliably or let \SpecialChar LyX
35441 to support it directly.
35444 \begin_layout Subsection
35445 SVN and Windows Environment
35448 \begin_layout Quote
35449 My inclination is to say that if the user cannot figure out the command line operations on their own fairly quickly,
35450 they would be well advised to use TortoiseSVN.
35457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35461 \begin_layout Standard
35462 In addition to installing \SpecialChar LyX
35464 and having access to a Subversion repository,
35465 the user will need to install the Subversion client program.
35466 A Windows installer for the client program is available from
35467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35470 target "http://www.collab.net/nonav/downloads/subversion/"
35476 The user may also want to install
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35480 target "http://tortoisesvn.tigris.org/"
35486 which integrates Subversion operations into the context (rightclick) menu of Windows Explorer.
35487 Operations done outside \SpecialChar LyX
35488 will typically be more convenient using the Explorer context menu.
35489 Note that TortoiseSVN is not a replacement for the client program,
35490 which is what \SpecialChar LyX
35494 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35495 Bringing a document under Subversion control
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 Before a \SpecialChar LyX
35500 document can be brought under version control in Subversion,
35501 its parent directory needs to be under version control.
35502 If the document is being added to a project already in the repository,
35503 this is accomplished by checking the project out to the directory where the new document will be placed.
35504 If the project itself is not yet under version control (for instance,
35505 if this document starts a new project),
35506 the directory must be imported into the repository.
35507 This is done outside \SpecialChar LyX
35509 Both import and checkout are easily accomplished from the Explorer context menu using TortoiseSVN,
35510 or alternatively can be done using the command line client at a DOS prompt.
35511 The procedure for importing the project using TortoiseSVN is described below,
35512 assuming an existing repository and a new project being started in
35519 For information on using the Subversion client program,
35527 \begin_layout Enumerate
35534 in Windows Explorer,
35538 TortoiseSVN\SpecialChar menuseparator
35543 adjust the URL for the repository,
35547 \begin_layout Enumerate
35548 Right click the level of the repository under which you want to place the new project folder (typically the top level) and click
35552 Supply a name for the project folder and click OK.
35553 Add a message for the log file if desired,
35554 then click OK again.
35555 The new project folder should appear in the repository.
35557 click OK again to exit the repository browser.
35560 \begin_layout Enumerate
35561 Once again right click
35568 this time selecting SVN Checkout\SpecialChar ldots
35569 Select the URL of the project folder you just created in the repository,
35570 and set the checkout directory to
35578 You will be warned about a non-empty folder;
35579 click OK to proceed.
35580 You should now have a
35591 \begin_layout Enumerate
35592 Create or open your document in \SpecialChar LyX
35595 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35600 Control\SpecialChar menuseparator
35604 Add a log message and click OK to commit the document to version control.
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35608 From this point onward,
35609 you should have full functionality in the
35611 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35619 You also have the option of checking the document in and out,
35620 viewing its history,
35622 using the TortoiseSVN context menu in Windows Explorer or the Subversion client program from a command prompt.
35625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35626 SSH tunnel used with SVN under Windows
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 Compared with Linux setting up an svn client to communicate over ssh under Windows is a rather troublesome task.
35631 We will at least offer some hints how to setup the client side but prior knowledge about ssh and the Windows command line is needed,
35632 also be prepared for a great deal of frustration\SpecialChar ldots
35636 \begin_layout Enumerate
35637 Get an svn client for windows,
35638 as described in the previous sections.
35639 When it is a fresh install run some svn command (e.g.
35641 \begin_inset Flex Code
35644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35650 ) to create config files,
35651 which you will need to change later on.
35654 \begin_layout Enumerate
35655 Choose an ssh client for Windows.
35656 There are several possibilities,
35657 we will use the one from Putty tools
35661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35662 \begin_inset Flex URL
35665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35667 http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html
35678 You will need to set the connection up so that the client doesn't ask for any password from you.
35679 To keep things easy we will use only keys without any additional password protection etc.
35683 \begin_layout Enumerate
35685 \begin_inset Flex Code
35688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35695 Save your private .ppk key file and put the public one on the server side.
35696 If the SVN server runs on Linux,
35697 note that the format of the public key is not compatible with Linux openssh and you will need to direcly copy-paste the key from the
35698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35703 Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file
35706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35709 edit field into the server's
35710 \begin_inset Flex Code
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35714 ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
35720 \begin_inset Flex Code
35723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35732 \begin_layout Enumerate
35734 \begin_inset Flex Code
35737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 In the SVN config file
35748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35749 Exact path depends on Windows version,
35750 usually somewhere around
35751 \begin_inset Flex Code
35754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35757 Documents and Settings
35771 \begin_inset Flex Code
35774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35794 \begin_inset Flex Code
35797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35798 ssh=c:/path/plink.exe -i c:/path/private_key.ppk
35807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35808 It will usually take a lot of time to get exact command right and it depends on many things.
35809 For example do not have some remote server saved as a default session in Putty etc.
35811 try to connect via plink without SVN first.
35820 \begin_layout Enumerate
35821 Checkout the SVN archive,
35823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35827 \begin_inset Newline newline
35831 \begin_inset Flex Code
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35835 svn co svn+ssh://user@server/repository_path
35843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35844 End-of-Line Conversions
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 When the collaborators are mixing Linux and Windows environments,
35850 will use different line endings inside the .lyx files.
35851 This is not a problem as far as \SpecialChar LyX
35852 functionality is concerned,
35853 but the commit diffs will be huge and merge-conflicts prone.
35854 Fortunately SVN itself knows
35858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35859 \begin_inset Flex URL
35862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35864 http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.file-portability.html
35874 how to deal with CR/LF problems when switching .lyx files to the
35875 \begin_inset Flex Code
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35891 \begin_inset Flex Code
35894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35895 svn propset svn:eol-style native FILE_NAME
35908 \begin_layout Subsection
35909 GIT commands in \SpecialChar LyX
35913 \begin_layout Standard
35914 A minimal subset of GIT commands is now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35916 You can find the commands in the
35918 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
35920 \begin_inset space ~
35926 Please note that if you use password protected access to repository via ssh,
35927 you will be asked in terminal window.
35929 was tested against GIT 1.7.
35933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35934 Windows users please note that you need to ensure that git is on the path.
35935 This can be set from within \SpecialChar LyX
35938 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35939 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35940 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35951 \begin_layout Standard
35952 One big difference of GIT and the other supported version control systems is the distributed nature of GIT:
35953 With traditional version control systems there is one central server which hosts the repository.
35954 Users commit their changes to the server,
35955 and get updates made by other users from it.
35957 users commit to a local repository.
35958 The local repository can be synchronized with one or more remote repositories using the
35959 \begin_inset Flex Code
35962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35969 \begin_inset Flex Code
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 does not interact in any way with remote GIT repositories.
35981 It works exclusively with the local repository in a very similar way as with a central CVS or SVN repository.
35982 If you use remote GIT repositories you need to do the
35983 \begin_inset Flex Code
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35993 \begin_inset Flex Code
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 operations with your favourite GIT client.
36005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36011 \begin_layout Standard
36012 If your document is not under revision control,
36013 this is the only item shown in the menu.
36014 And if it is under revision control,
36019 item is not visible.
36022 \begin_layout Standard
36023 This command registers in GIT your document ONLY in case you have already the documents directory under GIT control (in particular
36028 This means you have to checkout the archive by yourself.
36031 \begin_layout Standard
36032 Then you are asked interactively to supply an initial description of the document.
36033 Don't forget that registered file is not yet committed.
36036 \begin_layout Standard
36037 GIT command that is run:
36041 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36045 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36051 \begin_layout Standard
36056 to understand the switches.
36059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36066 When you are finished editing a file,
36067 you commit your changes.
36069 you are asked for a description of the changes.
36070 After that changes are committed.
36073 \begin_layout Standard
36077 git commit -q -m"<description>" <file-name>
36080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36083 Revert To Repository Version
36086 \begin_layout Standard
36087 This will discard all changes made to the document since the last check in.
36088 You get a warning before changes are discarded.
36091 \begin_layout Standard
36096 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36100 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36112 \begin_layout Standard
36113 This will rename the current document including the version history.
36114 It requires a clean document without any changes since the last checkin.
36115 You are asked for a file name and a description of the rename operation.
36116 After that the document is renamed,
36117 both locally and in the repository.
36118 If the parent directories of the new and old file names differ,
36119 all relative paths of included files are adjusted (like in
36121 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
36127 the document is reloaded using the new name.
36130 \begin_layout Labeling
36131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36142 \begin_inset Newline newline
36146 \begin_inset Flex Code
36149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36153 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36157 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36161 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36165 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36174 \begin_inset Newline newline
36178 \begin_inset Flex Code
36181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 This shows the complete history of the GIT document.
36201 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36205 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36210 is shown in a browser.
36213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36219 supports GIT hash number of the last commit to the file,
36221 \change_inserted 1119979965 1564297456
36222 its abbreviated form,
36226 date and time of last commit.
36227 All those are extracted from
36229 git log -n 1 --pretty=format:%H%n
36230 \change_inserted 1119979965 1564297427
36236 Tree version information is obtained via
36238 git describe --abbrev --dirty --long
36242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36244 reference "subsec:VCS-Revision-Information"
36252 \begin_layout Subsection
36256 \begin_layout Standard
36257 With the recent addition of the
36258 \begin_inset Flex Code
36261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36267 function \SpecialChar LyX
36268 power users are allowed to create their own commands for revision control.
36271 \begin_layout Standard
36272 As an example you can see how two TortoiseSVN commands could be integrated directly:
36275 \begin_layout Description
36278 \begin_inset Flex Code
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36282 vc-command DR "." "TortoiseProc /command:commit /path:$$p"
36290 \begin_layout Description
36293 \begin_inset Flex Code
36296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 vc-command DR "." "TortoiseProc /command:revert /path:$$p"
36305 \begin_layout Subsection
36306 Version control and Document comparison
36309 \begin_layout Standard
36310 One of the typical uses of version control is to inspect the changes between revisions,
36311 usually by creating
36312 \begin_inset Flex Code
36315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36322 While this is useful for plain text files,
36323 it is much less useful in the case of \SpecialChar LyX
36325 which have more a complicated structure.
36326 Hence we provide binding to the Document comparison feature.
36327 There are two ways of calling this feature – either by direct call of
36328 \begin_inset Flex Code
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 function (for details see \SpecialChar LyX
36339 functions manual) or by the toolbar icon
36353 One can either compare two chosen revisions of the document or he can simply compare the current version of edited text with older revisions (where '
36354 \begin_inset Flex Noun
36357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36363 ' revisions back means comparison of the edited file with last commited revision).
36367 \begin_layout Standard
36368 This feature is supported for SVN and RCS though due to the more complicated versioning scheme of RCS there is a constraint – when addressing the revisions in dialog,
36369 numbers always point to the last number in RCS revision number,
36372 We don't currently support GIT addressing of revisions,
36373 one can just compare edited document with its revision X steps backs,
36374 where X is addressed as
36375 \begin_inset Flex Code
36378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36387 \begin_layout Section
36389 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161575
36390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36392 name "sec:Literate-Programming"
36398 Literate Programming
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36406 (kayvan@sylvan.com)
36411 original documentation written by
36413 Edmar Wienskoski Jr.
36416 (edmar-w-jr@technologist.com)
36419 \begin_layout Subsection
36423 \begin_layout Standard
36424 The main purpose of this documentation is to show you how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36425 for literate programming,
36426 where it is assumed that you are familiar with this programming technique,
36428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36444 If that is not the case,
36445 please follow the web links provided in the following sections.
36446 There is a lot of good documentation out there covering old development history to the latest tools tips.
36449 \begin_layout Standard
36450 It is also assumed that you are familiar with \SpecialChar LyX
36451 itself to a point that you are comfortable changing your \SpecialChar LyX
36453 and X resources file.
36454 If that is not the case please refer to other \SpecialChar LyX
36455 documentation to cover your specific needs.
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36459 Literate Programming
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 From the Literate Programming FAQ:
36467 \begin_layout Quotation
36468 Literate programming is the combination of documentation and source together in a fashion suited for reading by human beings.
36470 literate programs should be enjoyable reading,
36473 I couldn't resist!) In general,
36474 literate programs combine source and documentation in a single file.
36475 Literate programming tools then parse the file to produce either readable documentation or compilable source.
36476 The WEB style of literate programming was created by D.
36477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36481 Knuth during the development of his \SpecialChar TeX
36482 typesetting software.
36486 \begin_layout Standard
36487 Another excerpt says:
36490 \begin_layout Quotation
36493 How is literate programming different from verbose commenting?
36496 \begin_layout Quotation
36497 There are three distinguishing characteristics.
36498 In order of importance,
36504 \begin_layout Itemize
36505 flexible order of elaboration
36508 \begin_layout Itemize
36509 automatic support for browsing
36512 \begin_layout Itemize
36513 typeset documentation,
36514 especially diagrams and mathematics
36518 \begin_layout Standard
36519 Now that I sparked your curiosity,
36520 take a look in the references.
36523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36528 The complete Literate Programming FAQ can be found at:
36531 \begin_layout Quote
36532 Literate Programming FAQ
36533 \begin_inset Flex URL
36536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36538 http://www.literateprogramming.com/lpfaq.pdf
36546 \begin_layout Standard
36547 The FAQ lists 23 (twenty three!) different literate programming tools.
36548 Where some are specialized or
36549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36556 for particular programming languages,
36557 while other have general scope.
36562 for my own use for several reasons:
36565 \begin_layout Itemize
36566 It can generate the documentation either in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36570 \begin_layout Itemize
36571 It has a open architecture,
36573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36577 \begin_inset space \space{}
36580 it is easy to plug in new filters
36584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36589 are programs that read a given data stream and output a manipulated data stream.
36591 a WEB file (consisting of literate code) can be turned into a file consisting only of C program code or \SpecialChar LaTeX
36597 and to perform special processing that you may need.
36601 \begin_layout Itemize
36602 There is a good selection of filters available already (the HTML is one of them).
36605 \begin_layout Itemize
36609 \begin_layout Standard
36610 The Noweb web page can be found at:
36614 \begin_layout Quote
36616 \begin_inset Flex URL
36619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36621 https://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/
36629 \begin_layout Standard
36630 Starting from there you can reach many other interesting links and even some literate program examples.
36633 \begin_layout Subsection
36635 and Literate Programming with Noweb
36638 \begin_layout Standard
36639 The \SpecialChar LyX
36640 support for Literate Programming is provided by using the generic \SpecialChar LyX
36641 converters mechanism.
36642 This support is provided in a
36643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36656 \begin_inset space \space{}
36659 you will be able to use this new \SpecialChar LyX
36660 feature with some other literate programming tool of your choice by just changing your \SpecialChar LyX
36664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36665 Generating documents and code (weaving and tangling)
36668 \begin_layout Paragraph
36669 Using the noweb module
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36673 If you have installed Noweb and \SpecialChar LyX
36675 whenever you open a new document,
36676 after you have chosen its document class,
36679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36691 If Noweb is correctly installed,
36692 when you click on the
36693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36709 module in the available list and you can add it to your document.
36712 \begin_layout Paragraph
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36718 enables you to write code with a custom inset named
36719 \begin_inset Flex Noun
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 Noweb delimits chunks like this:
36732 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36736 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36740 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36744 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36748 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36752 \begin_layout Standard
36753 The problem is that whatever is written in between the << and the
36757 must be taken literally,
36759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36763 \begin_inset space \space{}
36767 should be prevented from making any special interpretation of what has been written.
36768 This is also handled by
36769 \begin_inset Flex Noun
36772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36779 that works like a normal text inset but has a free spacing capability.
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36784 you can also use the
36785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36792 construct of Noweb in your chunks to add items to Noweb's identifier cross-reference:
36795 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36799 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36800 def some_function(args):
36803 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36804 "This is the doc string for this function."
36807 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36813 \begin_layout LyX-Code
36814 @ %def some_function
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36818 For an example of this usage and the resulting cross-reference output,
36819 look at the Literate python program in
36821 LIBDIR/examples/listerrors.lyx
36823 which should make this all clear.
36826 \begin_layout Paragraph
36827 Generating the documentation
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 At this point you already have a new document file with a proper document class,
36832 and with some code and text on it.
36834 The answer is simple,
36837 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36842 Just like you would do for a plain document.
36843 No special procedure is required.
36846 \begin_layout Standard
36847 To help orientate you,
36848 I will now explain what happens inside \SpecialChar LyX
36852 \begin_layout Enumerate
36855 Update\SpecialChar menuseparator
36858 menu option is chosen,
36859 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36866 If the document is of any literate class the generated file will be named with an extension name defined by the
36867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36874 format (defined in the Preferences panel),
36875 otherwise the file will have the usual
36883 \begin_layout Enumerate
36884 Note that the only difference so far is in the name of the file,
36885 no special processing is required by \SpecialChar LyX
36887 Given that you formatted the code using the
36888 \begin_inset Flex Noun
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36899 takes care of the business.
36902 \begin_layout Enumerate
36903 If the document is of any literate class \SpecialChar LyX
36904 will then use the internal \SpecialChar LyX
36905 to Noweb converter,
36906 followed by the Noweb to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36912 The converters are defined in the
36914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36935 manual for general information about converters.
36940 to generate the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36945 \begin_layout Standard
36946 Otherwise it will just skip this step.
36950 \begin_layout Enumerate
36953 is invoked and the regular post processing continues as in a plain document.
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Independence from a particular
36958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36965 is easily achieved by changing the commands that are run by the various converters.
36968 \begin_layout Paragraph
36969 Generating the code
36972 \begin_layout Standard
36973 When the build menu option is chosen or the corresponding button in the toolbar is pressed,
36974 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36975 file is generated just like step 1 above.
36983 This converter needs to be defined by the user and is not installed by default,
36984 though the Program format is.
36985 This converter (like any other converter) will have two parts:
36988 \begin_layout Enumerate
36989 The converter program itself.
36990 This program performs the conversion from the one format to the other (in this case,
36991 from the Noweb format to the Program pseudo-format).
36994 \begin_layout Enumerate
36995 The error log parser.
36996 This is a program whose sole purpose is to rewrite error messages in a format that \SpecialChar LyX
36998 This makes it possible for \SpecialChar LyX
36999 to place error boxes in the right places in the file buffer.
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37016 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37024 \begin_layout Standard
37025 This basically means that \SpecialChar LyX
37027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37034 (a program or script) with the name of the Noweb file (normally a file in the \SpecialChar LyX
37035 temp directory) and the directory path of the original \SpecialChar LyX
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 This is an implementation of
37042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37049 that you can place in a directory on your path:
37052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37067 notangle -Rbuild-script $1 | env NOWEB_SOURCE=$1 NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR=$2 sh
37070 \begin_layout Standard
37071 The next part of the converter setting is the
37072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37079 which is to be set to
37082 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37085 parselog=$$s/scripts/listerrors
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 This will run any errors that are generated by the
37090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37097 process through the
37098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37108 \begin_layout Standard
37109 The build will normally take place in \SpecialChar LyX
37110 's temporary directory,
37111 so the files produced by the conversion will be in that directory.
37113 will copy out what it regards as the `main' file,
37118 conversion may produce several files,
37119 and so most of these would then be deleted when \SpecialChar LyX
37121 This is why we pass in the NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR environment variable so that the build-script chunk can place the generated files in that location.
37124 \begin_layout Paragraph
37125 Build instructions in the document
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 The last piece of the integration between \SpecialChar LyX
37131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37140 the instructions for building your program should be embedded in a chunk of its own.
37142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37149 above uses the notangle command to look for this chunk (called
37150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37157 ) and runs its contents through
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37170 such a chunk would look something like this:
37173 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37177 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37179 \begin_inset Newline newline
37182 if [ -z "${NOWEB_SOURCE}" ]
37183 \begin_inset Newline newline
37189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37190 NOWEB_SOURCE=myfile.nw
37191 \begin_inset Newline newline
37195 \begin_inset Newline newline
37199 code to extract files ...
37200 use NOWEB_OUTPUT_DIR here ...]
37201 \begin_inset Newline newline
37205 code to compile files ...]
37206 \begin_inset Newline newline
37212 \begin_layout Standard
37214 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161716
37217 LIBDIR/examples/listerrors.lyx
37221 LIBDIR/examples/Literate.lyx
37222 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161716
37226 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37227 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37228 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37234 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161729
37238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37245 program for some illustrations of how all of these pieces go together or in
37246 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161756
37249 LIBDIR/examples/noweb2lyx.lyx
37250 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161756
37254 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37255 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37256 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37257 Noweb2\SpecialChar LyX
37268 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161767
37271 files show off the language-indepence of the \SpecialChar LyX
37272 literate programming support since they are written in Python
37273 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161782
37277 and Perl respectively.
37280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37281 Configuring \SpecialChar LyX
37285 \begin_layout Standard
37286 All the Literate Programming support is configured by the
37288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37300 The important parts are:
37303 \begin_layout Description
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37320 format Set up via the File Formats tab,
37321 this is where the Noweb-specific pieces are set up.
37331 the file extension is set to
37336 This tells \SpecialChar LyX
37337 to create a file with a
37341 extension in the first step of the conversion process.
37344 \begin_layout Description
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37357 format This is an empty format whose sole purpose is to be the endpoint of a conversion (which then allows us to set up a converter for it).
37360 \begin_layout Description
37370 This converter performs the
37371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37378 of the literate document.
37381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37386 noweave -delay -index $$i > $$o
37389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37395 \begin_layout Description
37405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37414 the Converter is set to
37415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37428 \begin_inset Newline newline
37432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37437 parselog=$$s/scripts/listerrors
37440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37446 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37450 \begin_layout Standard
37451 There is also a new function implemented in the \SpecialChar LyX
37454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37457 server-goto-file-row" function,
37458 to be used with ddd/gdb or other debugger.
37462 \begin_layout Standard
37463 When debugging code with ddd/gdb,
37464 it is possible to invoke a text editor at the current execution position with a single key stroke.
37465 The default ddd configuration for that is shift-ctrl-V.
37466 It happens that you can define the editor command line invocation in ddd by accessing the
37468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37469 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37472 dialog and changing the "Edit Sources" entry.
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 I take advantage of the newly created \SpecialChar LyX
37477 server function and this ddd feature,
37479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37489 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37490 echo "LYXCMD:monitor:server-goto-file-row:@FILE@ @LINE@" >~/.lyxpipe.in
37493 \begin_layout Standard
37495 whenever you are using ddd and find a point in the program that you want to edit,
37496 you just press shift-ctrl-V (in the ddd window),
37497 and ddd will forward this information to \SpecialChar LyX
37498 through the \SpecialChar LyX
37499 server and then the \SpecialChar LyX
37500 window will show the same file with the cursor at the same position ddd was pointing to.
37501 No more guessing or long scrolling to locate a point in the program back from debugging !
37504 \begin_layout Standard
37505 Note however that you must enable the \SpecialChar LyX
37506 server to get this feature working (it is disabled by default).
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37514 reference "sec:Starting-the-Server"
37519 explains how to do that.
37522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 There are six new buttons that can be added to your \SpecialChar LyX
37529 Four of these buttons are short cuts to layout styles:
37552 one for the custom inset
37557 The last one is a short cut to the
37558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37569 \begin_layout Standard
37571 has a range of buttons that are available for tool bar customization.
37572 In my toolbar I like to combine the six short cuts above with two more:
37577 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37582 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37594 Here is how it looks like:
37597 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37601 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37605 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37606 Icon "layout Standard"
37609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37610 Icon "layout Section"
37613 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37614 Icon "layout \SpecialChar LaTeX
37618 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37619 Icon "layout \SpecialChar LyX
37623 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37624 Icon "flex.insert Chunk"
37627 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37631 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37635 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37636 Icon "buffer-typeset"
37639 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37640 Icon "build-program"
37643 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37647 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37651 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37655 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37659 \begin_layout LyX-Code
37663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37664 Colors customization
37667 \begin_layout Standard
37668 There are a number of colors in \SpecialChar LyX
37669 that can be customized in
37674 One of the things that bothers people is the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37676 The default color is red,
37677 since the chunks uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
37679 and there is a lot of chunks in literate documents,
37680 you may get tired of seeing everything in red.
37681 You can change it by going to the tabs
37691 \begin_layout Standard
37692 The next thing is the visible presence of the newline character in the screen.
37693 You can choose the color of this particular character and make it blend in the background.
37694 I recommend you choosing a color that is close to the background but not equal,
37695 that way you still can see it is there,
37696 but it is not bothering you anymore.
37699 \begin_layout Subsection
37704 \begin_layout Standard
37714 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161863
37717 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37718 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
37724 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643409
37730 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161856
37733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37734 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37735 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37741 \change_deleted 564990737 1671643461
37742 the Sweave manual (menu
37744 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37748 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161856
37751 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37752 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar menuseparator
37754 \change_deleted 564990737 1672161921
37759 \change_inserted 564990737 1672161917
37762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37763 Open Example\SpecialChar menuseparator
37764 Modules\SpecialChar menuseparator
37768 \change_deleted 564990737 1672742969
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37774 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355343
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37780 \change_deleted 564990737 1671355343
37781 You can do everything with \SpecialChar LyX
37782 that you can do with \SpecialChar LaTeX
37786 cannot support every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37788 But you can always use \SpecialChar TeX
37790 This chapter shows you some more special things you might want to use.
37791 For other special things you can do with figures,
37798 \begin_inset space ~